Home

Premier Elite Series Installation Manual

Contents

1. Tamper Mains Terminal Switch Block amp Cable Entry Leg rt SE L H E i BT L E nn RH l Cable 2 5 Amp Mains i a VK O O Ss Set Entry PSU qe Y DE A E n i O HL to 5 ki i ap aj m Plug on ki Man J Digimodem Sar a eessen Com300 y Com2400 i EE q BAR CODE Control Panel Sege ii Texecom Circuit Board GET rh menn q lim YO EE e d Ee z Se Se SS E SE S De pi ta S o e ae Cable ge p CT ar Entries EE a i l it Zo 1 l K W LOS a i pi atan a di Space for So 1 x 7Ah Battery Er 2 x 7Ah Batteries E ES or 1 x 17Ah Battery 4 3 Zz An LD a ZAZA I l 08 ZAN l iol mon i ily zc i ae Ki l l ena j INS176 10 9 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Premier Elite 24 PCB Layout i oft 9 3 SA 0 75A 03A pi ann USE WITH 3 TEXECOM PSU Batt Charge ONLY oF at Kick Start Fret Dear Bell Network Aux 12V itt Engineer Engineer DC F8 Txe Mmm
2. fm O N C Com N O N C Com N O N C Com N O N C Com N O N C Com N O N C Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 Relay 8 1K0 LED Connecting Inputs The RM8 Relay Module has 8 auxiliary inputs These inputs can be used to activate the relays from an external source Each input is Ve applied and draws up to 30mA The diagram below shows typical wiring examples for the inputs SE OIE NI 3 N 4 Ve Outputs Ali Alle Alls Alla ALS ALS AL7 ALS S 5 Ras eae ee ource Outputs Os See NI 7 Premier RM8 Relay Module A 8 28 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation Zone and Output Numbering 24 48 88 168 Expander Zones Keypad Zones Addrasa Zones Zones Address Zones Zones Network 1 Network 2 Network 1 Network 2 1 9 16 73 80 1 Unmapped Unmapped 2 17 24 81 88 2 Unmapped Unmapped 3 25 32 89 96 3 Unmapped Unmapped 4 33 40 97 104 4 Unmapped Unmapped 5 105
3. 27 37 4 28 38 4 57 67 TI 87 58 68 78 88 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 Panel Panel RR Engineer Anti Code RedCARE Keyswitch User 2 S Wintex 3 3 4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 Expander ID is transmitted as follows 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 Network 6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 EXP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 17 27 37 47 57 67 LP 87 1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 i i 3 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 Expander ID is transmitted as follows 4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 Network 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 ESA S 4 5 i E 6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 7 7 7 8 8 8 2 2 3 3 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 4 4 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 6 6 7 7 8 8 Power Fault ID Reset ID is transmitted as follows 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 Bell Under Voltage Digi Under Voltage ons System Under Voltage ATS Path Fault ID Aux Under Voltage Line Fault ID is transmitted as follows Battery Under Voltage Device ID etwork 1 Under Voltage Panel 00 work 2 Under Voltage RedCARE 01 work 3 Under Voltage Com 300 Com 2400 02 work 4 Under Voltage Com IP 002 Expander ID is transmitted as follows work 6 Under Voltage
4. 88 and 168 only 168 only Note n order for an output module to mimic zone expander outputs the output module must be addressed the same as the zone expander that it is mimicking Any combination of addresses can be used on each output module i e Bank 1 can be addressed to mimic expander 3 and Bank 2 can be addressed to mimic expander 8 Bank 1 switch sets the address of the device that Bank 1 outputs 1 to 8 will mimic Bank 2 switch sets the address of the device that Bank 2 outputs 1 to 8 will mimic INS176 10 27 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Output Module Numbering The table below shows the output allocation when the output modules are installed Address MEM a a kis 1 Expander 1 1 8 Expander 1 1 8 2 Expander2 1 8 Expander2 1 8 3 Expander 3 1 8 Expander 3 1 8 4 Expander 4 1 8 Expander 4 1 8 DEA Expander 5 1 8 Expander 5 1 8 6 Expander 6 1 8 Expander 6 1 8 ZZ Expander 7 1 8 Expander 7 1 8 8 Expander 8 1 8 Expander 8 1 8 ch Network 2 can only be used on the 168 88 and 168 only 168 only for 640 see page 30 Outputs The output module has 16 programmable outputs which can be used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED s sounders or relays etc Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 34 see page 77 for details The electrical charac
5. Identifying the Control Panel Maximum Current Available INT IN TU Ge SE EOS 3123982 Serial Number Rated Output Type Code Battery Battery Rated Output Amps Type Code Description Arrangement Charge 12h 24h 30h 60h AL Ge 1x7Ah 0 3A 0 484 019A 013A 0 021A AEJ Premier 48 1x17Ah 0 3A 1 32A 0 61A O 47A 0 18A AFG Premier 48 W 868MHz 0 75A 1 0A 0 61A_ 0 47A 0 18A AFN Premier 48 W 433MHz e AEK Premier 88 Standby and Recharge Times AEL Premier 168 EN50131 1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 AEZ Premier 640 Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h 30h Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs i i PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Premier Elite 24 Polymer Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs Current Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs Current Consumption 95mA 30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC otherwise 60h Maximum Current Available This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC 0 3A charge 141A Jumper Settings Rated Output p g Recharge Battery Battery Rated Output Amps Battery Arrangement Time Battery Charge Selector Arrangement Charge 12h 1 x 7Ah 24Hrs 03A 1x 7Ah 0 3A 0 48A 24hrs 075A e lt 72Hrs 0 3 A Standby and Recharge Times EN50131 1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Power Supply Type A Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs Rated Input 220V 240V 50 60Hz 1A PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Rated Output Current 40 C 2 5A MAX _Standby Period _ 12 Hrs 12 Hrs Rated Input 100VV
6. UK English INS176 10 System Overview Premier Elite Series Installation Manual 90900000A BEBOYOBLL GERGEN r m Power S Ready OK Ready Omit Ra Service Zone Expanders 8XP e 8 fully programmable DP or EOL zones GC gt I Armed Info a e 8fully programmable outputs 100mA ve applied each e Speaker output e Programmable auxiliary input e Remotely wired 60iXD e 2 loops x 30 fully programmable iD zones e iD biscuit technology e Plug on iD is a registered trade mark of Chloride Safety System Limited Output Expanders OP16 e 16 fully programmable outputs 100mA each e 1 fault output 100mA ve applied e Can be connected to mimic panels to give zone indication e Can be connected to relays and sounders RM8 Relay Module e Plug on relay card RedCARE footprint e 8 separate inputs for standalone operation e 8x 3Amp relay outputs n o n c com e Output ON LED indication Communicators Com300 e Multi protocol communicator supporting Fast Format Contact ID SIA Level Il and EasyCom Pager protocols e 300 baud modem for remote uploading and downloading using the Wintex UDL software and a PC e For use with an analogue telephone line REN 1 Com2400 e Multi protocol communicator supporting Fast Format Contact ID
7. Typical WAN configuration Premier Control Panel A Router or Gateway Network Hub Switch 8 GH INN _ q o Internet j L d J 0990 9089 989 0900 lot li l Alarms over IP Fast Format Contact ID SIA Wintex Alarm Recelving Centre Installation General The installation of the Com P module requires a basic understanding of networking and TCP IP protocol If you are not familiar with these concepts you may require assistance from an IT professional before attempting to install the module The ComIP module is designed to be fitted inside the control panel and is powered via the harness connection A suitable network cable should be fed into the control panel to allow connection the module PCB Layout t ve 6z La vr z0 an 5 S D Status LEDs 2 O O OC Resetting m a O Offline Monn m E O Online CtPo12sase m m mn Programming mode O LED On m LED Off EO LED Flashing DO 5 way harness connection to control panel ComiP Status LEDs G Network status LED Left Network status LED Right 5 RJ45 network Connection 6 MAC address Installation 1 Select Engineers mode on the control panel then remove the control panel lid 2 Choose a suitable location for the module Remember to allow enough space to plug in th
8. Battery Battery Rated Output Amps H H Arrangement Charge 12h Premier Elite 48 88 168 EEIT m EEG Current 2 Standby and Recharge Times Current Consumption 125mA Maximum Current Available ENS0131 1 Grade 1 Grade 2 O 75A charge 1 0A Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h 0 3A charge 1 9A Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Rated Output Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs Battery Battery Rated Output Amps Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs Arrangement Charge 24h 30h 60h 1x 7Ah 0 3A 0 166A 0 108A 4 x 17Ah 0 3A 0 583A 0 441A 0 158A 0 75A 0 583A 0 441A 0 1588A 18 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation Connecting AC Mains The AC Mains supply is connected to a 3 way Euro Type fused terminal block which is fitted with a 3 15A medium slow blow fuse Note All other wiring MUST be carried out before AC mains is connected to the control panel After connecting the AC Mains fit the mains cover this can be found in the spares bag FUSE 3 15A i 9 a To PSU Lei D Q Connecting Batteries If installing to PD6662 2004 then only One 12V 7Ah battery or 12V 17Ah battery can be fitted inside the control panel to provide continued operation in the event of an AC mains failure otherwise two 12V 7Ah batteries can be connected
9. e e e etwork 5 Under Voltage e e e Network work 7 Under Voltage EXP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 work 8 Under Voltage 1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 168 amp 640 Only 640 Only 2 2 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 3 3 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 4 4 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 6 6 7 7 8 8 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 INS176 10 107 Setup Users Premier Elite Series Installation Manual 5 8 Setup Users Activate the Radio FOB to assign itto the user Hee ela perg 7 te chiva ele ASSIGNING TAG Present TAG How Present TAG to assign itto user etur Users Add TAG to User IMPORTING TAG 1 Hew 2 Imrort Present TAG How Yes Press NO to exit Add TAG Routine Enter User Number ie 10 User 10 Press YES to delete the User from ths system Setur Users Enter User i Setur Users Useraiz Do You Want to DELETE User 618 Sear aS Enter User code number 4 5 or 6 digits long Use keys 1 8 to select e g 1234 1234 lt lt a User option or use the SCROLL key to search Enter User Code En Press NO to d select deselect the User option AB L ee Use keys 1 8toselectarease g 2 B _ Use the area key to toggle between areas
10. ENTRY Area The Entry mode has been started for area EXIT Area The Exit mode has been started for area EXP Reset EXP Line Fault EXP LOST A reset has been performed using the input on expander programmed as reset The Input on expander programmed as line fault has been activated Expander has been lost from the network EXP Tamper The cover of expander has been removed EXP Low Voltage Expander has detected that its supply voltage is low F PA A Panic Alarm from a Radio FOB has been generated Fault Override The system has been armed with a Fault condition present by a user FIRE Active Zone programmed as Fire Alarm has caused an alarm FIRE Tamper Zone programmed as Fire Alarm has caused an Tamper alarm FIRST KNOCK Zone which is programmed as double knock has activated for the first time FUSE Alarm The Auxiliary 12V Fuse in device has failed GSM MODULE LOST The GSM Module has lost communications with the control panel iD Loop Tamper There is a short circuit on iD loop on the iD expander Key switch Reset A reset has been performed using a key switch KSW Disarmed A Keyswitch zone type has been activated zone number LOG ALERT 80 of the Event Log has filled since the last Upload Download LOG CLEARED The event log has been erase
11. A IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES INSIDE NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS NO USER ACCESS note ONLY connect the mains supply to the mains terminal block NEVER connect the mains supply directly to the PCB ALWAYS refer to National Wiring Regulations when conducting installation An appropriate and readily accessible disconnection device e g an unswitched fused spur MUST be provided as part of the installation The disconnection device must NOT be fitted in a flexible cord Where identification of the neutral in the mains supply is NOT possible a two pole disconnection device MUST be used Use mains cable of adequate carrying capacity for the rated current i e at least 0 75mm INS176 10 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Premier Elite 24 Control Panel Layout Polymer 9 8 Si BF Plug on Control Panel a ao ou Circuit Board Com300 Com2400 Mains Terminal Cable Block 8
12. 6 2K2 4K7 6k8 Alternative TEOL configuration with 4K7 alarm resistor 6K8 fault resistor and 2K2 EOL resistor 7 4K7 4k7 Alternative EOL configuration with 4K7 alarm resistor and 4K7 EOL resistor 8 WD Monitor Specialised wiring configuration for monitoring warning devices with fault reporting capability Only use this wiring type on zones types programmed as Auxiliary Normally wired as a Normally Closed circuit Ricochet Device Mode Ricochet Device Mode determines how wireless devices will operate on the system This option only appears in the menu after a device has been learned to the zone and replaces the wiring type options e Always Awake o This mode should only be used on devices which are required to signal at all times and is the default setting for the Impaq Contact W and Impaq Plus W e Hybrid o Hybrid mode is used to control the reporting functions for devices When in the mode devices are asleep when the system is set and are woken up by the control panel at the point of arming When the system is disarmed the devices will be put back to sleep This mode of operation is the default mode for XT W QD W amp DT W e Auto o When in Auto Mode devices poll at 15 minute intervals Following activation devices will not transmit the same activation again for a period of 3 minutes Exp O P 1 2 Exp O P 3 4 Exp O P 5 6 Exp O P 7 8 Exp O P 1 3 Exp O P 4 6 For Future Use Zone Groups Zone group
13. Type Switched ve Switched ve Switched ve Switched ve NOTE 88 168 amp 640 only Wiring Outputs Relay The diagram below shows some typical wiring examples ve Applied Outputs e LED 1KO Vd Ela VW Ho 12V Buzzer A 12v A or Diode IN4148 Mi NM 12v ve Applied Outputs Vd E ov Ka LED 1K0 Vi Elo HCH 12V Buzzer A El op Ml ov IN4148 MM N T op pe For details on testing outputs see page 114 Digicom Outputs 1 8 The control panel has eight programmable outputs which can be used for connecting to a stand alone communicator see page 78 for details The table below shows the electrical characteristics for each output Terminal Max Current Operation 1 100mA Switched OV 2 100mA Switched OV 3 100mA Switched OV 4 100mA Switched OV 5 100mA Switched OV 6 100mA Switched OV 7 100mA Switched OV 8 100mA Switched OV L M N A 12V applied Line Fault R R N A OV applied to reset DC N A 12V Power unfused DC N A OV Power Control Panel Line Fault Input L M In accordance with BSIA form 175 the line fault input on the control can detect a single or a dual line fault for use with the ATS Remote Test output type Wiring a Stand Alone Communicator The diagram below shows a typical wiring example Stand Alone Control Communicat
14. pA All other wiring MUST be carried out before the battery is connected to the control panel Connect the red battery lead to the positive terminal of the battery and then connect the black battery lead to the negative terminal nore The panel will only become live when the AC Mains is connected or the Battery Kick start button is pressed Battery 12V 17Ah Battery OR Battery OR If not installing to PD6662 2004 _ Battery 12V 7Ah Battery eee 12V 7Ah Battery CS Two batteries can be fitted and still comply with PD6662 2004 if the Battery Splitter is used INS176 10 19 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Connecting Devices to the Network Before connecting keypads zone expanders and output modules isolate ALL power from the control panel AC Mains 8 Battery Do not continue H there is still power present on the control panel Nore Connecting devices with power still present on the control panel may damage the device or control panel and invalidate any warranty Keypads zone expanders and output modules are all connected to the same network terminals located at the bottom left hand corner of the control panel and may be connected serially daisy chain in parallel star or any combination of the two see Figure 1 page 21 for details Note NO more than 8 zone expanders 8 keypads and 4 output modules can be connected to each network The
15. 112 5 Unmapped Unmapped 6 113 120 6 Unmapped Unmapped 7 121 128 7 Unmapped Unmapped 8 129 136 8 Unmapped Unmapped Keypad Zones Zones Zones Zones Zones Zones Zones Zones Zones meh Network1 Network2 Network3 Network4 Network5 Network6 Network7 Network 8 1 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped 2 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped 3 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped 4 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped 5 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped 6 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped 7 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Expander OP16 Outputs Address Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Network 1 Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 Network 5 Network 6 Network 7 Network 8 1 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 2 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 3 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8
16. 120V 50 60Hz 1A Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs Rated Output CurrentQ40 C 2 3A MAX Power Supply Type A Rated Output Voltage 13 8Vdc 2 Rated Input 100V 240V 50 60Hz 1A Mains Terminal Block Fuse 250Vac 3 3 15A Slow Medium Blow Rated Output Current 55 C 1 5A MAX Maximum rating of each power output note that these are not considered to be independent power outputs according to EN50131 6 Rated Output Voltage 13 8Vdc 2 Aux 12V 1 0A Mains Terminal Block Fuse 250Vac 3 3 15A Slow Medium Blow Bell Strobe 1 04 Maximum rating of each power output note that these are not considered to be independent power outputs according to EN50131 6 Network 1 TOA Aux 12V TOA Battery 1 6A Bell Strobe 1 0A DESIDE Le Network 4 1 04 Standby Current 95mA Battery 1 64 Output Voltage Range 13 0V to 13 9V DC DC 1 04 Maximum Ripple Voltage 0 5V pk pk Standby Current 95mA Battery type sealed lead acid up to 18Ah Maximum recharge time 24h 0 75A Output Voltage Range 13 0V to 13 9V charge rate 72h 0 3A charge rate Maximum Ripple Voltage 0 5V pk pk Battery Low Voltage Signal 9 5V Battery type sealed lead acid up to 7Ah Maximum Power Output Fault signal 10 5V with mains present recharge time 72h Deep Discharge protection 8 1V Battery Low Voltage Signal 9 5V Over voltage protection trigger 16V Power Output Fault signal 10 5V with mains present Fuses F1 900mA Auxiliary 12V Power fuse Deep Discharge protectio
17. Ato Hand to P Premier 168 only For 640 see below y i User 18 Areas gt User 16 Areas gt Ifthe User Ifthe User Menu option is gt Akk gt ABest lt menu option selected the User Config is not selected menu will be displayed 4 Change Dun Code Sho 456 55 6 n Use keys 1 8toselect i Use keys 0 9 to select a User Config or use the a User type SCROLL key to search li e g 2 Manager l h d If a Custom User l User 18 T 3 User 16 Ture gt type is selected this Press NO to 1 Hot In Us Manager User Options menu select deselect f will be displayed the User option Yes A 1 n All User types 1 Except Custom Ces OBMONAL l l e y l l Select a Timer Control E e g 5 Timer Control 5 pr ES ce l l User 16 Locked User 18 Locked i by Timer by Timer 1 This option is only l fe Cres available to Users User 18 Door Ctl 1 with the Door S trike To a an e attribute l Yes i Qes Press NO to Use the keypad to program I edit the U ser text the same way thata name text mobile phone works l User 18 Hame ist Claire l Edit Text SABE Edit Text SABC l OPTIONAL l l ASSIGHING TAG Present TAG How Present the Proximity TAG eure e
18. CHARGER FAULT Battery Charge Current has Failed CIE Reset The internal processor has failed its self checks CODE Tamper Too many invalid key presses have caused a tamper alarm from keypad Com Line Fault The Com300 2400 or ISDN has detected a line fault COM PORT Alarm A com port has generated an alarm CONFIRMED ALARM Two or more detectors have activated resulting in a confirmed alarm condition CONFIRMED PA Two or more PA zones have activated resulting in a confirmed PA alarm condition ARMED WITH L F ARMING FAILED CONFIRMED INTRUDER The system has been armed with a Line Fault condition present Two or more detectors have activated resulting in a confirmed Intruder condition CORRUPT EVENT CROSS Alarm No event has been stored in memory A Verified Cross Zone Beam Pair Alarm has occurred from zone DATA CHANGED Programming data has been changed DATE CHANGED The control panel Time has been changed DEFAULTS LOADED The factory default values have been loaded into memory DEFERRED The arming mode was deferred for area DOOR Door has been opened by a user with Door Control DOWNLOAD START An Upload Download has been initiated DOWNLOAD END The Upload Download has finished DURESS User has entered a Duress Code at a keypad Engineer Reset A reset has been performed using an Engineers code
19. EI H Toh H H H cm 2 C TEXECOM 2010 T Tamper Test Relay Fault Relay an n n Made ih England Le C8 OFF S S e Im JP3 OFF Si BAT NoTE The Aux Fault relay should be programmed as Fault Grade 3 Installation Using a Zone Texecom Control Premier E lite Panel Sounder A 12V Ela B Bell Ba xl C Tamp Eu D ov Sa S Strb Ba Aux Fault MSW C TEXECOM 2010 2 E Tamper Test Relay Fault Relay Made In England uc ON SAB ON BAT Aux Fault Wire the Sounder Tamper Relay to these terminals Zone Wire the Sounder Fault Relay to any Zone looping out the Tamper connection The zone should be programmed as Auxiliary see page 51 and the wiring type set as WD Monitor see page 54 OP Optional Use a panel output wired to the Test terminal and programmed as WD Test Active see page 79 This will allow activation of the Test Mode remotely from the Diagnostics function in Wintex Note For details on testing the Bell outputs see page 114 INS176 10 33 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Panel Outputs The control panel has five programmable outputs which can be used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED s sounders or relays etc see page 77 for details The table below shows the electrical characteristics for each output No Max Current
20. INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Global Options 05 Global Bell Time When all areas are armed the system uses the Global Bell Delay and Global Bell Duration timers see page 63 for details Area Bell Time When all areas are armed the system uses the Area Bell Delay and Area Bell Duration timers see page 55 for details 06 24Hr Omit Global 24 Hour type zones can be omitted from any keypad 24Hr Omit Local Only keypads assigned to the same area as the 24 Hour type zones can be used to omit the zone 07 Remove Omits When zones have been Omitted by a user the zones will be automatically reinstated by the system when the area they are assigned to is next disarmed Leave Omits When zones have been Omitted by a user the zones will remain omitted until the user reinstates them 08 Override Com Div If an area is Fully armed and an Intruder alarm occurs in that area Intruder alarm events for that area are reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre immediately Enforce Com Dly If an area is Fully armed and an Intruder alarm occurs in that area Intruder alarm events for that area are reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre after any programmed Coms delay has expired see page 55 for details 09 NVM is Unlocked The factory default settings can be reloaded by pressing the Factory Restart button during power up NVM is Locked The fa
21. Keypad Lockout Restore Alarm Restore Tamper Zone No Keypad No Code Tamper Alarm Restore Alarm Not Reported Tamper Keypad No Soak Test Alarm Restore Alarm Not Reported Test Zone No Manual Test Call Restore Alarm Restore Test Zone No 00 Automatic Test Call Restore Alarm Not Reported Test 00 User Walk Test Start End Restore Alarm Not Reported Test User No Restore Restore User No 104 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL 8 Digi Options No Type Event Reporting Group Contact ID SIA ID 75 NVM Defaults Loaded Alarm Not Reported Zone No Restore Not Reported Zone No 76 First Knock Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 77 Door Access Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 78 Part Arm 1 Alarm Not Reported Restore Close 401 CL User No 79 Part Arm 2 Alarm Not Reported Restore Close 401 CL User No 80 Part Arm 3 Alarm Not Reported Restore Close 401 CL User No 81 Auto Arming Start Alarm Not Reported Restore Close 401 CL 000 82 Confirmed Alarm Alarm Alarm 139 BV Zone No Restore Not Reported 83 Prox TAG Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 84 Access Code Changed Deleted Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 85
22. T transmits data and R receives data 6 Network Data Indicators The red LED indicates that data is flowing out of the control panel and normally flashes very quickly The green LED indicates that data is flowing into the control panel and normally flashes slowly the green LED flashes faster as more devices are connected 7 Communication Ports Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the control panel Com Port 2 is a serial communications port and can be used for connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the control panel 8 Auxiliary 12V Power These terminals are for connecting devices that require 12V power protected by a 0 9A PTC fuse 9 Expansion The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone Expander see page 32 for details or an AV Module see page 40 for details X 10 Module or a Memory Module Engineer REM ll 0 Gong Tx Rx a e FO EE a i E E EE Sseecosescesssessss O AUX 12V AUX ON Stb OV Tamp Bell 12 AUX Fault Spk Spk OP1 OP2 z1 Z2 23 Z4 BAR CODE Wireless Eng Kpd pou eee ees USE WITH TEXECOM PSU 10 External Sounder Connections These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit 11 Load Defaults Button Press and hold this button whilst applying power to the control panel to load the factory default settings Press and ho
23. The plug on communicator can be programmed to dial up to 3 sets of Alarm Receiving Centre ARC information Each Set consists of the following options Protocol This is the reporting protocol that is used to communicate with the Alarm Receiving Centre The following 4 protocols are supported e Fast Format The panel will report using Fast Format If this option is selected the Reporting Channels must be programmed see below e Contact ID The panel will report using Contact ID If this option is selected the Reporting Areas must be programmed see below e SIA Level II The panel will report using SIA Level II e EasyCom Pager The panel will report to an EasyCom type pager e SMS Messaging The panel will send Short Message Service SMS text messages to a mobile phone Primary Telephone Number This is the first telephone number that the communicator will dial for the Alarm Receiving Centre or the first mobile telephone number to send SMS to Each telephone number can be up to 24 digits Secondary Telephone Number This is the second telephone number that the communicator will dial for the Alarm Receiving Centre or the second mobile telephone number to send SMS to Each telephone number can be up to 24 digits Account Number This is the account number that will be reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre Each account number can be up to 6 digits Nore Each area can also have its own account number see pag
24. ACE Type B Current Consumption Quiescent 65mA Alarm Nothing Connected 65mA Storage Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F Maximum Humidity 95 non condensing Network 4 wire standard 7 0 2 alarm cable up to 250m Star Daisy Chain or any combination of the two EMC Environment Residential Commercial Light Industrial Industrial Bank 1 Outputs Outputs 1 to 8 Bank 2 Outputs Outputs 1 to 8 100mA switched to OV 100mA switched to OV Physical Environmental Dimensions W x H x D 145mm x 115mm x 30mm Packed Weight 260g Approx Operating Temperature 10 C 14 F to 55 C 131 F Zone Expanders Storage Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F Maximum Humidity 95 non condensing EMC Environment Residential Commercial Light Industrial Industrial Electrical Operating Voltage 9 13 7VDC ACE Type B Current Consumption 4XP 8XP Quiescent 65mA Alarm Nothing Connected 65mA Physical Dimensions W x H x D 170mm x 140mm x 35mm Data Network 4 wire standard 7 0 2 alarm cable up to 500m Star Daisy Chain or Packed Weight 200g Approx INS176 10 131 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Standards Standards 2004 108 EC CE directive Hereby Texecom declares that this device is in compliance with the essential
25. Areas assigned to Multi Knock Area will respond as follows e Zones with the Double Knock attribute will use the multiple knock value set up in system options for zone activations see page 68 for details Areas not assigned to Multi Knock Area will use the standard 2 knocks for zone activations For the Multi Knock Area feature to work the zone must be programmed with the Double Knock attribute see page 52 for details 26 UDL Keypad Areas assigned to UDL Keypad can be controlled i e armed disarmed reset etc from the On Line Keypad when using the Wintex software and a PC Areas not assigned to UDL Keypad cannot be controlled i e armed disarmed reset etc from the On Line Keypad when using the Wintex software and a PC 27 Auto Chime C2A Areas assigned to Auto Chime will respond as follows e Zones assigned to the selected areas that have been programmed for Chime will only chime when Custom Output 2 Stage A is on Areas not assigned to Auto Chime will only chime when chime for that area is manually enabled by the user DD 243 Options To comply with DD 243 during the normal entry delay the control panel must prevent a Confirmed Intruder Alarm from being reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre If a Portable ACE i e Electronic Keyswitch Key Fob Tag Swipe Card etc is being used for disarming it is permissible for the Confirmed
26. Cable Entry Entries 1 5 Amp Mains Space for PSU NE ee nn fon 1 x 7Ah Battery 1 D 250Vac 3A 3 15A Slow Medium Blow va HoIan a SOA Heu veeueg epee ieee nee Plug on Control Panel SEH Circuit Board A kman stp Com300 o M Sr Com2400 Mains Terminal Cable Block 8 Cable Entry Entries 1 5 Amp Mains Space for PSU 1 x 7Ah Battery 8 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation Control Panel Layout Metal All Models 768 shown
27. E Keypads Zone m rl Expanders or Premier Output Modules Output Module INS176 10 21 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Remote Keypads Keypad Layout Tamper Output Switch Speaker Network Output Terminals Address Switch Piezo Sounder Connecting Keypads Keypads are connected to the network terminals located at the bottom left hand corner of the control panel see pages 20 8 21 for details Keypad Addressing Each keypad must be assigned a different address using the DIL switches located on the left hand side of the PCB The table below shows the keypad addressing Address DIL 1 On or off Off Off Off 5 On 6 Off 7 gt Engineers Nore Never set two keypads on the same network to the same address When using a keypad as an Engineer s keypad the DIL switches must all be On 88 168 amp 640 only Keypad Zones The keypad has two programmable zones see page 31 for details Each zone is also fully programmable see page 48 for details Zone Numbering The table below shows the zone allocation when the keypads are installed Zones Zones Network 1 Network 2 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Address Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Address Zones Zones Network 3 4 amp 5 Network 6
28. Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Premier Elite 12 W 24 W 8 48 W PCB Layout 48 W Shown 6 D D G D F2 a O 075A 0 3A Fi an F8 Batt Charg Kick Start a G Jon A F3 O EJ A O com SE O 00000 Network Aux 12V Bell12V El a a e 3 Q m LU U K a Y U U K K K a Y Y K Load Defaults oN a w a won 20 30Y 8 WI Heat A 1 Battery Connections A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC Mains failure protected by 1 6 Amp PTC Fuse 2 Digicom Power amp Inputs These terminals provide un fused power remote reset and line fault inputs and are normally used for connecting a_ stand alone communicator to the control panel 3 Digicom Outputs Outputs 1 to 8 are low current 100mA ve applied and would normally be used when connecting a stand alone communicator to the control panel Each output is fully programmable 1 3 only on 12 W 4 Engineers Keypad A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier access for programming and testing Note When using a keypad as an Engineers keypad the address must be set to 10 The keypad zones and lid tamper are not monitored 5 Network Data Connections Network 1 provides connection for the keypads and zone expanders The and terminals provide power whilst the
29. SIA Level Il and EasyCom Pager and SMS Messaging protocols e 2400 baud modem for remote uploading and downloading using the Wintex UDL software and a PC e Sends SMS text messages to mobile phones e For use with an analogue telephone line REN 1 ComiP e Multi protocol communicator supporting Fast Format Contact ID and SIA Level Il protocols via TCP IP e High speed modem for remote uploading and downloading using the Wintex UDL software and a PC e For use with ADSL DSL Broadband WAN LAN etc ComGSM e Provides a GSM telephone path for Com300 amp Com2400 Digital Communicators e Sends SMS text messages to mobile phones e Arm Disarm Reset the alarm turn outputs on and off omit zones and send messages to the control panel using SMS text messages e 9600 baud modem for remote uploading and downloading using the Wintex UDL software and a PC Other Devices PC Com e For connecting a PC to the control panel via an RS232 Serial port allowing local uploading and downloading using Wintex UDL software USB Com For connecting a PC to the control panel via a USB 1 0 or 2 0 port allowing local uploading and downloading using Wintex UDL software PRINT Com e For connecting a serial printer to the control panel Memory Module not 640 NOTE Fits onto the expansion port to provide a 10 000 event log Battery Splitter NOTE Allows two backup batteries to be connected to a single set of battery terminals and will
30. Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones Select characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate number of times to select a character on the same key press the eS key to move the cursor along Door Control This option would normally be used for access control as it only allows the user to open unlock doors that are assigned to that user code Note Door control is only available to users with the Door Strike attribute assigned to it Adding Tags When using a Proximity Keypad Tags can be programmed or imported from another panel When prompted select 1 to add new Tag or 2 to import a Tag from another system Tags can be imported from any other panel to any user and it is possible to import Tags from several other panels Deleting Users If a User code needs to be deleted from the system this must be done by a user that has access to the Setup Users menu To delete User codes proceed as follows Ensure that Setup Users is selected the display should look like this Bo sou wart to Setup Users Press Ces the display should look like this ES up Users nter sen Select a user from 1 to 24 48 1 to 49 88 or 1 to 199 168 CD CG 3 then press Cres the display should look like this Enter User Code gt Press Gest the display will look something like this Be ene act e Where 15 is the selected User number Press to confirm deletion of th
31. attribute is not selected U User Test The output will activate when a user performs a User test see page 118 for details Inverted The output is inverted an output that applies OV when active will become an output that applies 12V when active L Latching When activated the output will remain on until a valid User code is entered 1 Use Pulse Period 1 When activated the output will remain on for the duration of the Pulse Period 1 timer see page 63 for details 2 Use Pulse Period 2 When activated the output will remain on for the duration of the Pulse Period 2 timer see page 63 for details 3 Use Pulse Period 3 When activated the output will remain on for the duration of the Pulse Period 3 timer see page 63 for details C Only Active With Custom Output 1 Stage A The output will only operate whilst Custom Output Stage A is On see page Custom Outputs for details R Random The output will activate randomly A minimum and maximum On time can also be programmed see page 63 for details X 10 Outputs X 10 Outputs are outputs that can be configured to operate devices that are connected to an X 10 controller These outputs can be assigned a house and unit number To Program an output for X 10 proceed as follows Program the output type to ensure correct operation when the programmed condition occurs e an output programmed as Entry Exit will ac
32. to move the cursor along The table below shows the keys to use and the characters that are assigned to them Key Character a A B 2 la b D E 3 d e GIH I 4 g h ji So JiKILIS j k l M N O 6 minjo PJQI IRIS 7 plaqlir is T u vis t v WIX Y IZ 9S9 w x y z Move Cursor Backspace delete Copy Text Paste Text Predictive Text Upper Lowercase Predictive text and Clear Screen The control panel also features Predictive text This can be used to make inserting words easier i e when spelling the word PIR instead of typing 7444777 all that you need to do is type 747 and the word is automatically selected Note This feature can be turned on and off as required by pressing the key and can also be automatically selected every time text mode is entered see page 65 for details Copying and Pasting When programming any items i e Zones Timers Options etc pressing CHIME at any point will Copy the information that has just been programmed into memory To program another item using the information in memory select the item and press PART to Paste the information Note Copying and Pasting can only be performed whilst in the same option i e if a zone has just been programmed as Guard 1 Omit Access Areas ABC ALL of that information can be copied into memory so that when another zone is selected the sa
33. 1 is requested by the remote UDL computer This telephone number can be up to 24 digits Download Call Back Number 2 This is the telephone number that is dialled by the modem when Call back Number 2 is requested by the remote UDL computer This telephone number can be up to 24 digits Download Call Back Number 3 This is the telephone number that is dialled by the modem when Call back Number 3 is requested by the remote UDL computer This telephone number can be up to 24 digits UDL Password is When the remote downloading computer dials into the system the control panel compares the UDL password sent by the computer with UDL password stored in the control panel If the passwords match access to the control panel is granted if they don t match access is denied ch If more than three attempts at reporting are made with a wrong password the modem will lock out for 4 hours or until a Master User code is entered The UDL password programmed in this option must also be programmed in the customer account on the remote downloading computer This password can be up to 16 characters numbers and letters If no UDL Password has been programmed access to the contro panel can be gained by using the engineers code as the UDL Password UDL Options There are 6 UDL options that affect how and when access to the control panel via the Wintex UDL software is allowed Select options by pressing keys 1 to 6 a letter on th
34. 112 169 176 233 240 297 304 361 368 425 432 489 496 7 49 56 113 120 177 184 241 248 305 312 369 376 433 440 497 504 8 57 64 121 128 185 192 249 256 313 320 377 384 441 448 505 512 Zones Network 8 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped ojN IQ JO ASJWWIN Unmapped Expander OP16 Outputs Address Outputs Network 1 Unmapped Outputs Network 2 Unmapped Outputs Network 3 Unmapped Outputs Network 4 Unmapped Outputs Network 5 Unmapped Outputs Network 6 Unmapped Outputs Network 7 Unmapped Outputs Network 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 1 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2
35. 12V Tampers 1 8 1 Amp Connecting Expanders The 8XE local zone expander plugs directly on to the terminals located on the right hand side of the control panel see below for details To install the local zone expander proceed as follows 1 Ensure that all power is removed from the control panel mains and battery before attempting to fit the expander 2 Push the four support pillars supplied into the four locating holes on the control panel PCB 3 Align the local expander connector with the 8 way plug JP5 on the control panel Push expander into place ensuring that all four pillars clip into the four locating holes on the local expander Zone Numbering The table below shows the zone allocation when the expanders are installed Configuration Panel Zones Expander Zones BXE Zones 1 to 8 9 to 16 8XE Tampers 1to8 Tampers 1 to 8 Expander Zones The expander has eight programmable zones see page 31 for wiring details Each zone is also fully programmable see page 48 for programming details 8XP Zone Expander Expander Layout Engineers Tamper Keypad Network Switch Interface Terminals Power LED Zones 5 amp 6 Aux 12V Zones 7 amp 8 e e Address omPort Aux Speaker Outputs Switch Input Output 1 to8 Connecting Expanders Expanders are connected to the network terminals located at the bottom of the control panel see pages 20 amp 21 for details Expander Addre
36. 64 for details and deactivates when the zone activity is cleared 55 Arm Fail Warnin This output type activates when the selected area fails to arm after a period of time controlled by the area exit time when using Entry Exit or Exit Term arming and deactivates when the area arms 56 Forced Entry This output type activates for the duration of the Forced Entry timer see page 64 for details when any Guard or Custom zone with the Guard attribute is activated see page 52 for details 57 Zones Locked Out This output type activates when any zone is locked out following an Intruder Alarm activation and deactivates when all zones are clear and reinstated 58 All Areas Armed This output type activates when all of the selected areas are armed and deactivates when any one of those areas is disarmed 59 Time Arm Disabled This output type activates when the timed arming procedure is disabled see page 53 for details and deactivates when timed arming is reinstated 60 Armed Alarm This output type activates when the selected area is armed and deactivates when the selected area is disarmed This output type also pulses when an Intruder alarm occurs in the selected area and deactivates when the selected area is disarmed 61 Intruder Alarm This output type activates when an Intruder alarm occurs and deactivates when the Intruder alarm is cancelled Nore Tamper alarms will not activa
37. 7 amp 8 Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped Unmapped 1 8 Unmapped Note The zones inside the keypads are not seen by the system until they have been mapped to a zone number see page 74 for details 88 168 only 640 only Keypad Output The remote keypad has one programmable output which can be used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED s sounders or relays etc Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 34 see page 77 for details The electrical characteristics for the output are shown below Output Max Current Type 1 100mA Switched ve Keypad Speaker Output LCDL LCDLP Only The LCDL and LCDLP keypads have an output that can be used for driving up to one 16Q or two 8Q loudspeakers see page 33 for details Nore The speaker volume is also fully adjustable see page 74 for details Programmable Info LED The Info LED on the front of the keypad can be programmed to mimic the keypad output or show the armed status of an area see page 74 for details Adjustable Backlighting To adjust the keypad backlighting press the YES key for 5 seconds then with the YES key still pressed use ES to increase or decrease the backlighting until the required brightness is achieved then release both keys Note The backlight can only be adjusted when the keypad is not in a menu Keypad Lid Tamper The lid tamper of each keypad can be disabled if required u
38. 9 887 H1234567 l 51 Press NO to edit the accountnumber or press Use keys 0 9 to enter AREA to editthe area the account number account numbers e g 1234 Account1234 a E Account Humbert Account Humber 1334 Press NO to edit Enter the number the number of of dialling attempts dialling attempts e g 3 3 attempts Dialling Attempts Dialling Attempts gt Ba B3 Please refer to next page INS176 10 85 UDL 8 Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual From previous page if FastFormat protocol is selected Vv Press NO to edit the reporting channels Use keys 1 8 to select the Reporting channels e g 28 3 channels 2 3 Report in on Rerortind on Oa Rerortin9 on no Yes Press NO to edit the reporting channels Use keys 1 8 to select the Restoring channels e g 28 3 channels 2 3 Festarin9 ont CNo gt Regtor ina on do Restorin3 ont Yes lt Cres Press NO to edit the Open Close channels v Use keys 1 8 to select the Open Close channels e g 28 3 channels 2 3 Orerrclose ant no desann lose on e Se ant Cres Press NO to change the reports option No SE Area Ace No Use Area Acc
39. AC INPUT TERMINALS ON THE PCB 2 Battery Connections A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC Mains failure see page 19 for details 3 Digicom Power amp Inputs These terminals provide unfused power remote reset and line fault inputs and are normally used for connecting a stand alone communicator to the control panel see page 34 for details 4 Digicom Outputs Outputs 1 to 8 are low current 100mA ve applied and would normally be used when connecting a stand alone communicator to the control panel see page 34 for details Each output is fully programmable see page 78 for details 5 Engineers Keypad A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier access for programming and testing Note When using a keypad as an Engineers keypad the address must be set to 10 see page 22 for details The keypad zones and lid tamper are not monitored 6 Network Data Connections Networks provide connection for the keypads and zone expanders The and terminals provide power whilst the T transmits data and R receives data see page 20 for details 7 Auxiliary 12V Power These terminals are for connecting devices that require 12V power protected by a 1A fuse 8 Programmable Zones 1 8 These terminals provide the connections for the zones see page 31 for wiring details Eac
40. Amp Network 1 fuse F4 1 Amp Bell Strobe fuse F5 1 Amp Network 2 fuse 168 only Battery type sealed lead acid up to 7Ah Maximum recharge time 72h Battery Low Voltage Signal 9 5V Power Output Fault signal 10 5V with mains present Deep Discharge protection 8 1V Over voltage protection trigger 16V Housing 1mm Mild Steel Dimensions W x H x D 315mm x 415mm x 100mm Battery Compartment Packed Weight Up tp one 18Ah battery 4 5 Kg Approx Premier Elite 640 Current Fuses F6 PTC 0 9A Auxiliary 12V Power fuse F4 PTC 0 9 A Network 1 fuse F5 PTC 0 9 A Bell Strobe fuse Panel 24 amp 48 W 12 W Housing 3mm Polycarbonate 3mm Polycarbonate Dimensions W x H x D 305mm x 263mm x 283mm x 229mm x 98mm 85mm Current Consumption 125mA Maximum Current Available 0 75A charge 1 0A Battery Compartment One 12V 7 0Ah battery One 12V 7 0Ah battery Rated Output Packed Weight 1 7 Kg Approx 1 7 Kg Approx Battery Battery Rated Output Amps Arrangement Charge 12h 24h 30h 60h 1x17Ah 0 75A 1 0A 0 558A 0 416A 0 133A Premier Elite 48 88 168 A Standby and Recharge Times Current EN50131 1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3
41. Centre Each account number can be up to 6 digits Note n order for the control panel to use the area account numbers the area account Config option must be enabled see page 88 P Pulse Dialling for details The plug on communicator will always dial telephone numbers using pulse dialling 3 Pulse After 3 The plug on communicator will always dial telephone numbers using tone dialling However if the Communicator fails to dial the number three times in a row it will revert to pulse dialling for the remaining attempts B Blind Dialling The plug on communicator will not look for a dial tone before dialling a telephone number U Use MSN Pre Dial The ComISDN will only answer a call when the programmed MSN Pre Dial telephone number is dialled A Dial All Numbers If the communicator is acknowledged by the first ARC it will continue to dial any other programmed ARC This is normally used when a second or third ARC is programmed with SMS Messaging INS176 10 89 UDL 8 Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Area Accounts 640 e UDL Di3i OFtions Reset Didi UDL Didi Ortions Area Accounts Use the SCROLL key to search for areas Press NO to edit the account number Use keys 0 9 to enter the account number e g 1234 Account 1234 Area 18 Account 561234 When using Fast Format Contact ID or SIA each area can have its own acco
42. Com port on the control panel PC Com The PC Com has two connectors The 9 way D type connector is for connection to a serial port on a computer and the Molex connector plugs onto a Com port on the control panel pe d PRINT Com The PRINT Com has two connectors The 25 way D type connector connects to a Serial Printer and the Molex connector plugs onto Com 1 on the control panel a o Connecting a Computer The 24 48 88 168 amp 640 all support local uploading and downloading between the control panel and a PC running Wintex UDL software Uploading and Downloading can be used to program and interrogate the control panel In order for the computer to work correctly ensure that it is set to the following e UDL Password see page 92 for details o NOTE n order to upload and download to the control panel locally a USB PC Com lead is required Connecting a Printer The 24 48 88 168 amp 640 all support printer facilities The printer is connected to the Com 1 connector located on the control panel and can be used to print the control panel event log In order for the printer to work correctly ensure that it is set to the following e Baud Rate 4800 e Parity None e StartBits 1 e StopBits 2 e Data Bits 8 e DTR Normal e Columns 40 or 80 see page 66 Note n order to connect a printer to the control panel a PRINT Com lead is
43. Com Fort Setur Use the SCROLL key to selectthe required Com Port Cam Port 1 Abal Fitted Press NO to edit the Com Port Use keys 0 8 to select an device or use the SCROLL key to search e g 7 GSM Module Com Port 1 GSM Module The control panel must be programmed with the type of device that are connected to each of its coms ports Onboard Digicom Com Port 1 and 2 The following devices are available for fitting to the various ports No Module Fitted No Devices PC Com USB Com Com300 Com300 Communicator Com2400 Com2400 Communicator ComISDN ComISDN Communicator ComIP ComIP TCP IP Communication Module Modem Unit Standard Serial PC Modem Radio Pad Paknet RP9 Radio Pad GSM Module GSM Module Mobile Phone Crestron System Crestron Home Automation System 9 SIP Serial IP Protocol 10 RadioPlus Serial Wireless Receiver 11 Inovonics Radio Inovonics Serial Wireless Receiver 12 WebWayOne Emizon WebWayOne Emizon UDP Module 13 X 10 Control X 10 Home Automation Module 14 IRIS IP Chiron IRIS Serial TCP IP Module D d OO P o M A Onboard Digicom This option determines what type of device is connected to the plug on digmodem connector on the top right hand corner of the control panel Default Com300 The following devices are available from the above list 0 1 2 3 Com1 This option determines what type of device
44. Control Panels EN50131 options are disabled EN50131 Enabled Keypad display blanking is enabled i e the keypad will only display the time date and the banner message If information is available to be viewed i e AC Mains Fail Line Fault System Faults etc the keypad will bleep every 30 seconds and display System Alerts this information can only be viewed after a valid user code has been entered The keypad display will then blank again 30 seconds after The bell output will not activate if an alarm occurs during the entry mode NoTE Duress Codes can only be programmed by an engineer 35 2nd Zone Confirm After the entry timer has expired activation of 2 more zones is required to generate a Confirmed alarm 1st Zone Confirm After the entry timer has expired activation of 1 more zone is required to generate a Confirmed alarm 36 Keypads Global Keypads show information for all areas Keypads Local Keypads only show information that is relative to the area that the keypad is assigned to 37 Panel Grade 3 All options relating to PD6662 2004 EN 50131 1 Grade 3 are enabled automatically Also the Anti code reset becomes a 6 digit number and all user codes can only be programmed as 5 or 6 digits Panel Grade 2 All options relating to PD6662 2004 EN 50131 1 Grade 3 that are not required for Grade 2 are disabled automatically Also the Anti code reset becomes the standard 4 digit number and all use
45. Current Consumption _ 125mA Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h 30h Maximum Current Available Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs 0 75A charge 1 04 PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 0 3A charge 1 9A Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs Rated Output 30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC otherwise 60h Battery Battery Rated Output Amps aki R p SE Arrangement Charge 12h 24h 30h 60h This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC 1x 7Ah 0 3A 0 458A 0 166A 0 108A P I Type A E 0 3A 1 294 0 583A O0441A 0158A Sie ae S 0 75A 1 0A 0 583A_ 0 441A_ 0 1588A Rated Input 220V 240V 50 60Hz 1A Rated Output Current 40 C 2 5A MAX Standby and Recharge Times Rated Input 100VV 120V 50 60Hz 1A EN50134 1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Rated Output Current 40 C 2 3A MAX Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h 30h Rated Output Voltage 13 8Vdc 2 Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs Mains Terminal Block Fuse 250Vac 3 3 15A Slow Medium Blow PD6662_ Grade 1 Grade 2 Grades Maximum rating of each power output note that these are not considered to be Max Sam Aesharge Ti 5 gt H a independent power outputs according to EN50131 6 Imum r Im ri Fi ri 30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC otherwise 60h Aux 12V 1 0A Bell Strobe 1 0A This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC Network 1 amp 2 1 0A Jumper Settings Battery 1 6A Battery Arrangement me Battery Charge S
46. Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 4 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 5 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 6 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 7 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 INS176 10 29 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Zone and Output Numbering 640 Expander Zones Address Zones Network 1 Zones Network 2 Zones Network 3 Zones Network 4 Zones Network 5 Zones Network 6 Zones Network 7 Zones Network 8 Keypad Zones Address Zones Network 1 Zones Network 2 Zones Network 3 Zones Network 4 Zones Network 5 Zones Network 6 Zones Network 7 1 1 8 65 72 129 136 193 200 257 264 321 328 385 392 449 456 2 9 16 73 80 137 144 201 208 265 272 329 336 393 400 457 464 3 17 24 81 88 145 152 209 216 273 280 337 344 401 408 465 472 4 25 32 89 96 153 160 217 224 281 288 345 352 409 416 473 480 5 33 40 97 104 161 168 225 232 289 296 353 360 417 424 481 488 6 41 48 105
47. GD Yes Use the Chime amp Zone B61 Areasi Part keys Cesa BREBEFGHC Ha E to scroll between i Area Groups 1 2 3 amp 4 Press NO Y Ces to Change the Test type Y y Area 3 Zone 60d Test O Zone 004 Test I Use the Area key to select either Remote Test On Remote Test OFF i A H or LP areas 1 Zone BAL Areasi Use the numeric buttons 1 8 to Cres deck gt IK MOD toggle the required areas on or off LI Yes 48 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Zone Setup Ricochet Enabled Devices V2 00 V2 09 Option Switches In this mode only option switch 3 should be on Introduction Ricochet devices are learned through the Zone Setup Menu and Premier Elite SmartKey are learned through the User Setup menu the Configure Radio menu in Engineer s Utilities is now redundant and should not be used on V2 systems Learning Devices To learn a device to a Zone select the Zone from the Zone Setup Menu Zones that are capable of having a Ricochet device learnt to them will be displayed as follows Zone BAD Pal ol Hot Used a Fig 1 Fig 1indicates the pre assigned zone number the expander being used and the device slot on the expander Once a device has been learnt the display will be as Fig 2 Learn zone BES e PIR AP WOI ol Fig 2 If you are unsure if a zone already has a device learned to it you can go to the menu as in Fig 1 press and then if a device is already lear
48. LED s to indicate data flow The red LED indicates data flowing out of the T terminal and the green LED indicates data flowing into the H terminal The table below shows each LED status and its meaning LED Status T Wire OUT T Wire IN Red LED Flashing Normal Normal Red LED On Cable Short Red LED Off Panel Fault Panel Fault Panel Fault LED Status Green LED Flashing Green LED On Green LED Off Normal R Wire OUT R Wire IN Panel Fault Normal Cable Short No Data From Devices Panel Fault Note The LED s are provided as an aid for fault finding and therefore should not be completely relied upon to indicate that there is a fault 20 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation Figure 1 Network Connections 250m without additional power supply 250 m Premier Keypad Network Premier Zone Expander Premier Keypad Premier Keypad eg SE ral PPA DADO kt iii m Newark Fl SSS l Control Panel Network 1 or 2 To additional Keypads Zone Expanders or Premier Output Modules Output Module Figure 2 Network Connections 1km with additional power supply 250m 1 km Premier Keypad Premier Premier Premier Keypad Keypad Zone Expander New ak Saal E Ee 7 Es Ba Control Panel Network 1 or 2 Disconnect 12V from control panel To additional
49. OH Oe For Part Arm 2 one Bib is ON Use keys 0 9 to enter the required zone number or use the SCROLL key to search e g 064 Zone 10 oe Press NO to turn the zone On or Off for the selected PartArm For Part Arm Z one DI is 0FF A 5 10 Programming Part Arms Each area on the system can have up to 3 Part Arms When Part Arm 1 2 or 3 is selected pre programmed zones are omitted to allow access to certain parts of the building INS176 10 125 Ricochet Learn Premier Elite Series Installation Manual 5 11 Ricochet Learn Learning Devices Learn Devices from first power up Follow the instructions given on page 42 for first power up of the system When the Confirm Devices menu appears check and make sure all installed Keypads and Expanders are showing press and again to confirm Providing the system has a Ricochet enabled expander installed the following will appear The flow diagram shows the procedure to learn devices YES to Select When all device slots have been used the following screen will be Learn Ricochet shown T CDK All Devices Learn Device The bottom line of text shows Learnt Zon e TIT H2 E the Zone number the Network SEN Si OZE and the Expander the device will DIES be learned too Pressing the CED Gem key will return you to the R
50. Pad for reporting events to ARC 3 Pad ARC 3 Sec No This is the second number that is used by the Radio Pad for reporting events to ARC 3 Pad ARC 3 Prefix This number will prefix the account number for ARC 3 Radio Pad Attempts This is the number of times the Radio Pad will try to dial the Alarm Receiving Centre telephone number before giving up Note The number of dialling attempts is limited to 9 If this value is set to 0 the Radio Pad will never dial out Setup AV Module AV No 1 gt This is the first number that is dialled by the AV Module AV No 3 gt This is the second number that is dialled by the AV Module AV No 3 gt This is the third number that is dialled by the AV Module AV Dial Attempts This is how many times the AV Module will attempt to dial before giving up Notre The number of dialling attempts is limited to 9 If this value is set to 0 the AV Module will never dial out AV Re Dial Delay This is the amount of delay that the AV Module uses between re dialling telephone numbers Setup IP Module ComIP Address This is the IP Address of the IP Module ComiP Port This is the Port number of the IP Module ComiP Gateway This is the Gateway IP Address that the IP Module communicates through ComIP Mask This is the Subnet Mask number for the IP Module Polling SMG Address This is the IP address of a dedicated Polling or SMG Server that the IP Module might need to connect to Nam
51. Receiving Centre when the area is unarmed NOTE 24Hr and Tamper alarm events are always reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre when the area is armed regardless of whether the area is assigned to this option or not 22 Auto Arm Areas Areas assigned to Auto Arm Areas will respond as follows e When an assigned area is disarmed the Auto Arm Delay timer will start see page 63 for details e Every time a detector in that area is activated the timer is restarted e If the timer is allowed to expire i e no detectors in the assigned area are activated the area will arm itself Areas not assigned to Auto Arm Areas will never try to arm themselves 23 Area A Foyer Area A can be used as a common area automatically arms last and disarms first Areas assigned to Area A Foyer will cause the panel to respond as follows e When all assigned areas are armed Area A will automatically arm itself e When any one assigned area is disarmed Area A will automatically disarm itself Areas not assigned to Area A Foyer will not affect the automatic arming of area A 24 Log Part Omits Areas assigned to Log Part Omits respond as follows e When an assigned area is part armed all the zones that are omitted for that area are logged in the event log Areas not assigned to Log Part Omit will never log the zones that are omitted in the event log when the area is part armed 25 Multi Knock Area
52. Reported 35 Area Arm Suite Alarm Open Close Suite No 1 8 Restore Open Close 36 Armed with Line Fault Alarm Not Reported User No Restore Not Reported 37 Open Close Full Arm Alarm Open Close 401 OP User No Restore Open Close 401 CL User No 38 Open Close Part Arm Alarm Open Close 401 OP User No Restore Open Close 401 CL User No 39 Auto Open Close Alarm Open Close 403 OA 00 Restore Open Close 403 CA 00 40 Auto Arm Deferred Alarm Open Close 405 CE User No Restore Open Close 41 Open After Alarm Alarm Abort Alarm Open Close 406 OR 00 Restore Not Reported 42 Remote Open Close Alarm Open Close 407 OP 00 Restore Open Close 407 CL 00 43 Quick Arm Alarm Not Reported Restore Open Close 408 CL Keypad No 44 Recent Closing Alarm Open Close 459 CR 00 Restore Not Reported 45 Reset After Alarm Alarm Restore Reset ID Restore Not Reported 46 Power Output Fault Alarm Maintenance 300 YP Device ID Restore Restore 300 YQ Device ID 47 AC Fail Alarm Maintenance 301 AT 00 Restore Restore 301 AR 00 INS176 10 103 UDL amp Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Type Low Battery Event Alarm Reporting Group Maintenance Contact ID 302 System Power Up Restore Alarm Restore Maintenance 302 System Over Voltage Restore Alarm Not Reported Maintenance ATS Path Fault Restore Alarm Restore Maintenance Line
53. Rx l Se Bell 12V Smoke Bell Ne ere T Enable Enable D I Ge D0 120 neg gt O Expansion l ooo 0000000 een Tamper Disable Load Defaults O g O AS ao Fo ae ee ae EAS SSS KL HHHH ee ie a an ae en n Strb OV TampBell 12V T R opilspk Ai Avvraut 1 2 E 4 E 6 7 8 L M R R agd D o o an D ORTE BAR CODE Digi Modem Omooo Com2 13 m Lal tal ai tal si tz6J ai bzg o a avwa 2 1 Texecom PSU Connection Connected to the Texecom Switch Mode Power Supply DO NOT CONNECT THE MAINS SUPPLY TO ANY TERMINALS ON THE PCB 2 Battery Kick start Button When powering up the panel without AC Mains present this button must be pressed in order to connect the battery note f AC Mains is present this button does not need to be pressed 3 Earth Connection Connects the PCB to earth 4 Battery Connections A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC Mains failure see page 19 for details 5 Digicom Power These terminals provide power and are normally used for connecting a stand alone communicator to the control panel see page 34 for details 6 External Sounder Connections These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit see page 33 for details 7 Network Data Connections amp LED s Networks provide c
54. Whichever method of wiring configuration is used ensure that the voltage between the and terminals at each device is no lower than 10 0V when the system is running on the standby battery The table below shows maximum cable runs when one keypad or expander is installed using standard 7 0 2 alarm cable with various loads Max Cable Run 1 Keypad 2 PIR s 15mA 250m 2 Expander 2 PIR s 15mA 250m 3 Expander 8 PIR s 15mA 100m 4 As No 3 16Q Speaker 30m Configuration Distances of up to 1km can be achieved between the control panel and a device However a power supply must be installed close to the device to power it locally this will help to overcome voltage drop caused by the long cable run Overcoming Voltage Drop There are several ways to overcome voltage drop e Use thicker lower resistance cable Standard 7 0 2 alarm cable has a resistance of 8Q per 100m e Double up on the power connections this will require using a 6 or 8 core cable rather than a 4 core cable e Install a power supply to power the device locally remember to common the two negative connections Installing a Power Supply When a power supply is installed the OV connections on the power supply must be connected through to OV on the control panel and the 12V connection between the control panel and the device must be disconnected see Figure 2 page 21 for details Network Diagnostics Each network has two
55. activates when an External alarm or Arm Fail occurs in the selected area and deactivates when area is disarmed or a valid User code is entered 31 Detector Latch This output type activates for 5 seconds when the selected area is in the exit mode then activates again when the area arms and deactivates when an Intruder alarm occurs or the selected area is disarmed 32 Detector Reset This output type is normally active and deactivates for 5 seconds when the selected area is in the exit mode 33 Walk Test Active This output type activates when the Walk Test procedure is selected and deactivates when the Walk Test procedure is cancelled 34 Zones Omitted This output type activates when a zone in the selected area with the Omit attribute is omitted by the user and deactivates when the zone is reinstated 80 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual System Outputs 35 24Hr Zones Omit This output type activates when a zone programmed as 24Hr Audible or 24Hr Silent with the Omit attribute is omitted by the user and deactivates when the zone is reinstated 36 Reset Required This output type activates when the selected area requires a reset following an alarm and deactivates when the alarm is reset 37 Door Strike This output type activates for the 4 seconds when a User code with the Door Strike attribute is entered for the selected area 38
56. armed remotely using the Wintex UDL software and a PC Areas not assigned cannot be armed remotely 4 Remote Disarm Areas assigned to Remote Disarm can be disarmed remotely using the Wintex UDL software and a PC Areas not assigned to Remote Arming cannot be disarmed remotely 5 Panel Tamper Areas assigned to Panel Tamper will cause a Tamper alarm when the control panel cover is removed Areas not assigned to Panel Tamper will never cause a Tamper alarm when the control panel cover is removed 6 Bell Tamper Areas assigned to Bell Tamper will cause a Tamper alarm when the Bell tamper loop is broken Areas not assigned to Bell Tamper will never cause a Tamper alarm when the bell tamper loop is broken 7 Auxiliary Tamper Areas assigned to Auxiliary Tamper will cause a Tamper alarm when the Auxiliary tamper loop is broken Areas not assigned to Auxiliary Tamper will never cause a Tamper alarm when the auxiliary tamper loop is broken 8 Panel Speaker Areas assigned to Panel Speaker will cause the control panel speaker to activate when those areas are in alarm entry and exit etc Areas not assigned to Panel Speaker will never cause the control panel speaker to activate when those areas are in alarm entry and exit etc 9 Bell amp Strobe op Areas assigned to Bell amp Strobe op will cause the Bell Strobe output on the control panel to
57. armed when the suite is selected making it easier for the user to select multiple areas if required Example Area Arm Suites could be useful in a domestic situation where the user wants to arm areas A and B at night but does not want to select each area individually e Areas A and B would be assigned to Area Arm Suite 1 e When the user wants to arm the system at night Area Arm Suite 1 would be selected e Areas A and B are automatically selected for arming Note Descriptive text may also be assigned to the Area Arm Suite see page 57 for details Area Arm Suite Controller The suites can be assigned to keypads so that different combinations of areas can be armed or disarmed depending on which keypad is used see page 74 for details and operates as follows e Keypad 1 Area Arm Suite 1 Keypad 2 Area Arm Suite 2 Keypad 3 Area Arm Suite 3 etc e When a User code is entered at a keypad one of the Area Arm Suites is selected depending on which keypad was used and the areas contained within that suite arm using the arming mode for that suite the keypad sounder will also follow the areas defined by the suite 56 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Area Programming Area Arm Suites 640 ES to Selectii desa Progranning Area Programming Timers Area Programming Area Arm Suites Suiteal ArmAreal Use the Area key to select the Arm Area 1 4 Suiteal
58. block the transformer and the AC terminals on the PCB e Check the mains block is connected correctly live to live brown neutral to neutral blue No Power to unit battery only e Don t forget to press the battery kick start button e Check for loose wires at the BATT terminals on the PCB e Check that the battery wires are connected correctly red from BATT to the battery positive black from BATT to the battery negative Heartbeat LED is not flashing e Remove ALL power AC Mains and Battery and then reapply power again Network Data LED s are not flashing e Remove ALL power AC Mains and Battery and remove ALL wires from the network terminals Then re apply power again before referring to the Network Diagnostics table on page 20 Keypads Keypad does not operate e Check that the keypad is wired correctly from the control panel see page 20 for wiring details e Check the network fuses F3 and F5 and replace if blown e Use the network diagnostics see page 20 for details NOTE Only on 48 88 168 Keypad does not accept codes e If the system has more than one keypad check that each keypad is addressed differently see page 22 for details e If the keypad is on a long cable run check the voltage between the and terminals at the keypad and ensure that it measures no less than 10 0V e Check that you are using the correct User codes The default Engineer code is AYI Gi and the default Ma
59. button whilst applying power to the control panel to load the factory default settings Press and hold this button for 7 seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer code to the factory setting of A D Ga Note Loading the factory defaults can take up to 60 seconds to complete Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been locked see page 65 for details 21 Heartbeat LED Power Light Flashes steadily to indicate that the control panel is functioning correctly If the light is ON or OFF all the time then there could be a problem see page 42 for details 22 Battery Kick start Button When powering up the panel without AC Mains present this button must be pressed in order to connect the battery NOTE JF AC Mains is present this button does not need to be pressed 23 Current Reading Pads To calculate the current draw of the control panel measure the voltage across the two pads and multiply by 10 i e Reading 34mV x10 340mV 340mA F1 F14 Protection Fuses The following electronic fuses are provided e F3 1600 mA Battery e 4 250mA Speaker e F5 900mA Network 1 e F6 900mA Bell Strobe e EF 900mA Network 2 e F8 900mA Network 3 e F9 900mA Network 4 e F10 900mA Network 5 e F14 900mA e F11 900mA Network 6 e F12 900mA Network 7 e F13 900mA Network 8 Auxiliary 12V INS176 10 17 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Ma
60. call to the Alarm Receiving Centre or to initiate a remote Upload Download call to one of the programmed call back numbers MSN Pre Dial No LDL Di9i Ortions HSH Fre Dial Ho Use keys 0 9 to enter numbers Omit Chime Part 3 second Pause Area 10 Second Pause Yes When a ComISDN is connected to an extension of an ISDN line with more than 1 number the direct dial number should be programmed in here this ensures that the ComISDN will only answer a call when the direct dial number is dialled This number can be up to 24 digits Note The Use MSN Pre Dial option must also be enabled see page 89 for details When entering the telephone number the following extra keys can be used 84 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL amp Digi Options Program Digi BC B23 ee UDL Didi Options Reset Didi Start Use keys 0 4 to Selectthe required Alarm Press NO to select select a protocol or use Receiving Centre Set the protocol the SCROLL key to search e g 2 Set 2 Ge bien A Prato Format Use keys 0 9 to enter the telephone number Press NO to edit Omit Chime 8 the Primary Part 3 second Pause telephone number Area 10 Second Pause EIS CHE CH vle 21 Use keys 0 9 to enter the telephone number Press NO to edit Omit Chime the Secondary Part 3 second Pause telephone number Area 10 Second Pause
61. e 500 programmable User codes e 5000 Event Log time 8 date stamped e 5 programmable panel outputs 4 x 1A amp 3A relay e 2 5 Amp power supply Premier Elite 12 W 24 24 W 48 48 W 88 168 amp 640 e 32 Event Alarm Log e 250 500 Event Mandatory Log e 3 8 programmable digicom outputs 100mA each e 32 character zone text e Facility for Plug on Digimodem Com300 2400 e Facility for Plug on IP Module ComIP Chiron WebWayOne Emizon e Facility for a plug on RedCARE RM8 Relay Module Not Premier 12 W 24 amp 24 W e PC Com printer port Remote Keypads LCD e 32 character text display e 2 fully programmable DP or EOL zones e 1 fully programmable output 100mA ve applied e Fully adjustable back lighting normally bright dim or off changing to bright during entry or following a key press e Built in piezo sounder e Programmable Info LED LCDL ALL the features of the LCD plus e Larger 32 character text display e Speaker output LCDP e LCD with a built in Proximity Tag Reader LCDLP e LCDL with a built in Proximity Tag Reader FMK SMK e LCDLP Metal Flush or Surface Mount e Various finishes available RKP8 16Plus e LED Arming keypad e 2 fully programmable EOL zones e CANNOT be used for Programming Icon Guide English UE Keup acd Omit Texecom Service
62. feature of the Wintex UDL software Rings Required This counter controls the number of rings the modem needs to see before it will answer the call Default 003 UDL Dial Attempt If a Call Back is started this option controls how many times the modem will try to call the remote downloading computer before giving up Default 003 Note Enter the number of dialling attempts This number is limited to 9 If this value is set to 0 the communicator will never dial out This only affects the modem for download access and does not affect the operation of the communicator in any way 92 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL 8 Digi Options Setup Modules EC Alai e Ces LEL Di9i OFtions Reset Digi Gres UDL Digi Options Radio SMS Option Use keys 0 9 to enter the telephone number Use keys 0 9 to select Press NO to editthe ARC Omit Chime Ces Press YES to setup an option or use the Primary Radio Pad Part 3 second Pause the Radio Pad SCROLL key to search telephone number Area 10 Second Pause Setur Radio Pad Fes Pad ARC 1 Pri Ho gt Pad ARC 3 Pri Ho No eno Cc Use keys 0 9 to select Press NO to enter Enter the number Press YES to setup an option or use the the number of of dialling attempts the Radio Pad SCROLL key to search dialling attempts e g 5 5 attempts APO
63. is entered Press O to scroll through the options and press to select them or use keys a Letter option IS selected Star option is NOT selected The following options are available U User Menu The selected user has access to the User menu However the selected user will only have access to options assigned in User Config see page 111 for details E Eng Program Engineers onl Only Available to Engineers D Dual Code The selected user can only access an area when a second User code with the Dual Code attribute and also assigned to the same area is entered Dual Code users will also activate the 1 and 2 Code output type V Vacation The selected user is enabled the first time it is used to disarm the system and can be used as many times as required However it will be automatically deleted the first time that the User 01 code is used to disarm Vacation users will only be deleted by the Master user once they have been used on the system S Door Strike The selected user will activate any outputs programmed as Door Strike whenever their codes are entered R Call Rem PC The selected user has access to the Call Remote PC option allowing them to initiate a call to a remote upload download PC C Duress Code The selected user will activate any outputs programmed as Duress whenever their codes are entered O Open Close The selected user will
64. is reset 12 Medical This output type activates when a zone programmed as Medical or a keypad Medical 7 amp 9 causes a Medical alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 13 Auxiliary Alarm This output type activates when a zone programmed as Auxiliary causes a Silent alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 14 Tamper Alarm This output type activates when any type of Tamper alarm occurs in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 15 Alarm Abort If the selected area is in alarm this output type activates when a User code is entered to cancel the alarm in the selected area and deactivates after 10 seconds 16 Ready This output type activates when all zones in the selected area are secure and deactivates when any zone in the selected area is activated 17 Entry Mode This output type activates when the selected area is in the entry mode and deactivates when the area is not in the entry mode 18 2 Entry Mode This output type activates when the 2 entry timer for the selected area starts and deactivates when the 2 entry timer expires 19 Exit Mode This output type activates when the selected area is in the exit mode and deactivates when the area is not in the exit mode 20 Entry Exit Mode This output type activates when the selected area is in the entry or exit mode and deactivates when the area is no longer in the e
65. it will only be recognised by the system when all areas it is assigned to are armed Programming of Zone Areas for the 640 has additional requirements Areas on the 640 are divided into 4 sets of 16 areas identified by the table below A B C D E F G H 1 J K L M N O P A B C D E F G H 1 J K L M N O P A B C D E F G H 1 J K L M N O P A B C D E F G H 1 J K L M N O P Use the a key to switch between Area Groups 1 2 3 amp 4 Use the Chime amp Part keys to scroll between Area Groups 1 2 3 amp 4 one Bal Areas Zone D I Aressi ABCDEFGHS detokstokstok Use the Area key to select either A H or FP areas Use the numeric buttons 1 8 to toggle the required areas on or off Zone D I Aressi Sole LIKL MWOP Zone Text Each zone can have up to 32 characters of descriptive text assigned to it Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones Select characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate number of times to select a character on the same key press to move the cursor along For a more information see page 47 The control panel also features Predictive text This can be used to make inserting words easier i e when spelling the word PIR instead of typing 7444777 all that you need to do is type 747 and the word is automatically selected DA This feature can be turned off if required by pressing the key and can also be automatically selected every time te
66. learned too the system the control panel zones will remain at factory defaults Deleting Devices Delete Devices To delete devices from the system access the Ricochet Learn menu Any of the methods previously detailed may be used The CO Geset key is used to access the Delete option Follow the flow diagram below to delete devices from the system 126 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Ricochet Learn gt YES Lo Selectii Learn Ricochet D Learn Device one 777 H E Esseg Pelete Device zone 777 HT E Pressing the Meni key will return you to the Ricochet learn menu pressing the Qese key will enter the Learn devices menu between the Learn or Delete options The KO key will cycle Use the a KX or to select different zones It is only possible to select Zones which have devices learned If all devices are deleted from the system the following will be shown All Devices Deleted INS176 10 127 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Specifications 6 Specifications Control Panels
67. length of time that the Random output attribute will activate for 23 Door Strike Time This timer controls the length of time that the Door Strike output will activate for whenever a code with the Door Strike attribute is entered 24 Zone Response This timer controls the length of time that a zone with the Quick Resp attribute has to be activated for in order to be recognised by the control panel INS176 10 63 Global Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual 25 Keypad PA Delay When keypad option 6 is programmed as PA Delayed see page 74 for details and a keypad PA alarm 1 amp 3 is activated this timer starts If a User code is entered before this timer expires no PA alarm will occur However if a User code is not entered before this timer expires a PA alarm will occur 26 Confirmation Dly When an Intruder alarm occurs this timer starts If a second different zone is activated within this time window the Confirmed output will activate When this timer expires the Confirmed output will no longer activate 27 Warning Delay When a Custom zone with the Warning Req attribute see page 53 for details activates this timer is started If the zone is still active when this timer expires a warning tone or alarm will occur and the Warning Output see page 81 for details will activate 28 Keypad Lock Time When code tampers are prog
68. network terminals located at the bottom of the control panel see pages 20 amp 21 for details Addressing The iProx Module is addressed as a keypad and will occupy a keypad slot on the network The unit must have a unique address which must not conflict with keypad or any other iProx Module on the same network The following table shows the addressing Address NOTE Never set two modules on the same network to the same address 88 168 amp 640 only Refer to the iProx Module manual for programming and operating instructions 60iXD Zone Expander The 60iXD expander provides the following facilities e Two iD loops each supporting up to 30 biscuits e Fused 12V output for powering detectors e Engineer s keypad port for local iD diagnostics OP16 Output Expander Output Module Layout Aux 12V Network and Tam per Network Terminals Output Terminals Engineers Keypad Interface Bank1 Outputs 1to8 Tamper Switch Connecting Output Modules Output modules are connected to the network terminals located at the bottom left hand corner of the control panel see pages 20 amp 21 for details Output Module Addressing Each output module must be assigned a different address using the DIL switches located in the centre of the PCB The table below shows the expander addressing Address 1 2 3
69. not assigned to Full Arm Coms will never report Intruder alarm events to the Alarm Receiving Centre when they are fully armed 19 Part Arm Coms Areas assigned to Part Arm Coms will respond as follows e f an assigned area is part armed and an Intruder alarm occurs in that area Intruder alarm events for that area are reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre after any programmed Digi delay has expired Areas not assigned to Part Arm Coms will never report Intruder alarm events to the Alarm Receiving Centre when the area is Part armed 20 Unarm Fire Coms Areas assigned to Unarm Fire Come will respond as follows e f an assigned area is unarmed and a Fire alarm occurs in that area Fire alarm events for that area will be reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre Areas not assigned to Unarm Fire Coms will never report Fire alarm events to the Alarm Receiving Centre when the area is unarmed Note Fire alarm events are always reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre when the area is armed regardless of whether the area is assigned to this option or not 21 Unarm Tamp Coms Areas assigned to Unarm Tamp Coms will respond as follows e Han assigned area is unarmed and a 24Hr or Tamper alarm or reportable fault occurs in that area the event will be reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre Areas not assigned to Unarm Tamp Coms will never report 24Hr or Tamper alarm events or faults to the Alarm
70. on an area basis see page 60 for details 5 Clock Adjustment Adjusts the accuracy of the clock by subtracting or adding time in seconds at midnight every night O 50 50 0 no correction 100 50 6 Quick Count Set the number of 10milli Second pulses that are required within 30 Seconds in order for a zone with the Quick Response attribute to activate 7 Modem Level When using a Com2400 this option allows adjustment to the attenuation of the modem Modem Level 2 1 o 7 6 5 4 3 Attenuation dB 4 2 o 2 4 6 8 10 8 Language Selection Various languages are available for the control panels Listed below are the language sets and the languages available The Language set number is defined on the product label where applicable by LS1 LS2 or LS3 The 640 has all languages listed available in the control panel 24 48 88 168 LS1 LS2 LS3 English UK English UK English UK English English English Swedish Spanish Russian French Italian Slovenian Belgian Dutch Polish Czech Text Danish Hungarian German Norwegian Estonian Finnish 640 English UK Italian English Polish Swedish Hungarian French Russian Belgian Dutch Slovenian Danish Czech Norwegian German Finnish Estonian Spanish 9 Country Codes amp Defaults Country codes are used to define Telecoms requirements and defaults are loaded if available w
71. repositioning the aerial may require that the Com GSM is also repositioned A mobile phone may be used to locate the point of strongest signal The signal strength indicator is normally a bar or line at the side of the display on the mobile telephone The mobile phone method cannot provide information on the availability signal strength and interference status of all radio Base Stations in the surrounding area The signal strength reading is indicated on the Com GSM unit by use of LED s and can also be read from the keypad in the Setup Modules menu of UDL Digi Options When you have identified the point of the strongest signal make a note of this point and use it when installing the Premier Elite Com GSM aerial Installation The Premier Elite Com GSM module should be installed as close to the control panel as possible so that the harness lead supplied with the unit is able to plug onto the control panel communication port note The connection harness cannot be extended Route the harness lead into the module housing using the top left cable entry and plug the connector onto COM1 1 Install the module in the required location using suitable fixings 2 Route the other end of the harness lead into the control panel housing DO NOT CONNECT at this point 3 Connect the GSM antenna to the antenna connector on the module and site the antenna as high as possible 4 Unlock the SIM socket by sliding the locking
72. required PRINFCOM R5232 Data Connect to COM1 DATAC or RS232 printer INS176 10 41 Commissioning and Troubleshooting Premier Elite Series Installation Manual 4 Commissioning and Troubleshooting Commissioning Once ALL connections have been made to the control panel and power is ready to be applied you should read this section before continuing When applying power for the first time the factory default settings must be loaded The default settings ensure that the control panel software is reset and all programming information is loaded into memory For a complete list of factory default settings see separate Quick Reference Guide The factory default settings are loaded by applying power to the control panel whilst at the same time holding down the Factory Default button To default the control panel proceed as follows e Connect the black battery lead to the negative terminal of the standby battery and the red battery lead to the positive terminal of the standby battery e Press and hold the Factory Default button e Press the battery kick start button to connect the battery and ensure that the green heartbeat light illuminates e After the heartbeat light has illuminated let go of the Factory Default button the heartbeat light will continue to flash whilst the factory default settings are being loaded this can take up to 30 seconds e Ifthe system goes into alarm enter the
73. requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2004 108 EC waste in the European Union For proper recycling return this product to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new E Weee Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE directive Products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal equipment or dispose of it at designated collection points For more information see www recyclethis info RoHs Directive 2002 95 EC RoHS Compliant Hereby Texecom declares that this device does not contain lead mercury cadmium hexavalent chromium polybrominated biphenyls PBB or polybrominated depheny ethers PBDE in more than the percentage specified by EU directive 2002 95 EC except exemptions stated in EU directive 2002 95 EC annex This product is suitable for use in systems designed to comply with EN 50131 1 EN50131 3 and PD6662 at Grade 3 and Environmental Class II Warranty All Texecom products are designed for reliable trouble free operation Quality is carefully monitored by extensive computerised testing As a result the control panel is covered by a two year warranty against defects in materials or workmanship As the control panel is not a complete alarm system but only a part thereof Texecom cannot accept responsibility or liability for any damages whatsoever based on a claim that the control panel failed to function correctly Due to our policy of continuous improvements Texecom reserve the right to
74. seconds with the control panel still powered after 6 seconds the sounders keypads will bleep to indicate that the Engineer code has been reset note NO other codes programming will be affected it is just the User 00 Engineer code that will be reset The Engineer User 00 code can only be reset if the NVM has not been locked see page 65 for details Other Things to Know The key will always return to the previous menu level This is often the only way to exit an option after programming it Pressing several times will always return to the top level menu and the logout screen The Grea Cont Cat Grind and Ges keys often provide shortcuts or extended functions refer to individual programming options for details INS176 10 47 Zone Setup Premier Elite Series Installation Manual 5 1 Zone Setup p YES to Selecti Zone Setur Yes zone B81 Panel 1 Entra Esit 1 Enter zone number e g 004 Zone 004 7 J Q2 U
75. the input status affects the system please refer to page 76 For wiring details see page 35 Expander Outputs The zone expander has eight programmable outputs which can be used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED s sounders or relays etc Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 34 see page 77 for details The electrical characteristics for the outputs are shown below Outputs Max Current Type 1to8 100mA Switched ve Expander Speaker Output The expander has an output that can be used for driving up to one 16Q or two 8Q loudspeakers see page 33 for details Expander Com Port The Com Port can be used to connect a PSU200 or a monitored power supply Expander Lid Tamper The lid tamper of each expander can be disabled if required by fitting a jumper link across the centre and right hand pins of the Enable Tamper pins JP2 leaving the left hand pin free These pins are located to the left of the address DIL switch just beneath the fuse 26 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation iProx Module iProx Layout Option amp Address S witches Intemal Sounder Speaker _ Terminals Door Stike Relay Request to Wiegand Exitinput Interface Connections Remote Prox Coil Connections Network Terminals Speaker Volume Adj Connection The iProx Module is connected to the
76. the selected zone is activated and deactivates when the next time the zone is activated This output will work if the zone is armed or disarmed Omitted This output type activates when the selected zone is omitted and deactivates when the zone is reinstated Output Group User Code Entered Any user can be assigned to this output type This output type activates for 5 seconds when the selected User code is entered Output Group Control Timer Select a Control Timer These output types activate when the respective control timer turns on and deactivate when the timer turns off Output Group PC Control Select a PC Control These output types can be activated and deactivated using a PC running the Wintex UDL software Output Group Door Control Select a Door Control from 1 1 to 1 4 48 1 1 to 1 8 88 1 1 to 2 8 168 1 1 to 8 8 640 These output types activate for the duration of the Door Strike timer when a valid User code assigned to the same door is entered and deactivates when the timer expires These output types are used in conjunction with the Door Control User option see page 112 for details Output Attributes Assigning an attribute to an output will alter how the output works The following attributes can be assigned to any of the various types listed Select attributes by pressing keys 1 to 8 a letter on the display means the attribute is selected a Dot on the display means the
77. too It will not be possible to learn a device to a Zone that already has a device learned too it The number of expander s on the system will dictate which next free zone is chosen to learn too Auto Zone Type amp Area When learning devices if no editing has taken place of the control panel onboard hardwired zones these will be switched to Not Used after the first Ricochet device is learned to the system the following defaults will be used for Ricochet devices learned to the system 001 008 Not Used 009 Entry Exit 1 010 Guard Access 011 amp above Guard IMPORTANT If any editing of any of the on board control panel zones is carried out BEFORE any Ricochet devices are learned too the system the control panel zones will remain at factory defaults Deleting Devices Delete Devices To delete devices from the system access the Ricochet Learn menu Any of the methods previously detailed may be used The key is used to access the Delete option Follow the flow diagram below to delete devices from the system YES to Selecti If all devices are deleted from the system the following will be Learn Ricochet shown T Ges KY e Y The KO key will cycle Al l SE Learn Dev H GE between the Learn or Delete eleted Zone 777 H7 E7 options T Gee CO y Use the Go XD or Sto gt Delete Device Gi __ select differentzones It is only one 777 H E po
78. when the system is reset 10 Battery Fault This output type activates when the system detects a fault with the stand by battery and deactivates when the fault clears 11 Battery Test On This output type activates when the Battery Test starts and deactivates when the test expires see page 63 for details 12 Courtesy Light This output type activates when the Courtesy timer starts and deactivates when the timer expires see page 63 for details 13 System Open This output type activates when all areas are unarmed and deactivates when any area is armed 14 Fully Arm This output type activates when the system is fully armed and deactivates when the system is disarmed 15 Digi Failed This output type activates when the plug on communicator fails to report to the Alarm Receiving Centre after 3 dialling attempts and deactivates the next time the communicator successfully reports to the Alarm Receiving Centre 16 Digi Successful This output type activates when the plug on communicator successfully reports to the Alarm Receiving Centre and deactivates the next time the communicator is triggered 17 Digi Active This output type activates when the plug on communicator is triggered and deactivates when the communicator shuts down 78 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual System Outputs 18 UDL Lockout This output type activates when an attempt is made to upload downl
79. which is programmable and is defaulted to 3 Please see page 46 and 69 Minimum Logical Keys 10 000 for 4 digit code 100 000 for 5 digit code 1 000 000 for 6 digit code The number of disallowed codes 0 NOTE User codes must be programmed as a 6 digit code to comply with INCERT NoTE Dependant on the use of the Black Listed codes function available via Wintex a maximum of 16 codes may be Black Listed Calibration Checks amp Adjustments There are no calibration checks or adjustments available on the control panel Signal amp Message Processing Indications First alarm indications followed by any other events during the set period will scroll and can be controlled by the lt gt key on the keypad Memory Support A memory support battery is not required Compliance Label If the alarm system is programmed to NOT conform with EN50131 1 or EN50131 3 or is installed to Grade 1 the compliance label MUST be removed Engineer Access Global Options System Configuration Option 10 see page 65 set to Engineer only EN50131 and User Engineer for PD6662 Microprocessor Identification Premier Elite 24 48 88 168 24LC2561 P Data Network 4 wire standard 7 0 2 alarm cable up to 500m Star Daisy Chain or any combination of the two Remote Keypads 24 848 amp 48 W Up to 4 88 Up to 8 168 Up to 16 640 Up to 64 Expanders 24 Up to 2 48 amp 48 W Up to 4 88 Up to 8 168 Up to 16 640 Up to 64 Outpu
80. will be reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre immediately Conf Delayed Following the arming of the system area if two zones activate causing a Confirmed alarm the signal will only be reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre after the Abort time has expired 29 Abort Eng Reset An Intruder alarm that is aborted can only be reset by an Engineer Anti code Abort User Reset An Intruder alarm that is aborted can be reset by any User 30 Auto AV Output When using the AV Module if a microphone is remotely selected the corresponding output automatically activates Manual AV Output When using the AV Module if a microphone is remotely selected the corresponding output must be activated manually 31 Clock 50Hz The internal clock on the control panel runs from the 50Hz main frequency Clock Crystal The internal clock on the control panel runs from the built in crystal 32 80 Column Print Select this option when connecting an 80 Column printer to the control panel 40 Column Print Select this option when connecting an 40 Column printer to the control panel 33 Disable Text Areas that are armed are displayed as letters on the bottom line of the display i e Armed AB D Enable Text Areas that are armed are displayed using their assigned text on the bottom line of the display i e Armed Garage Office etc a different area is displayed every second 34 EN50131 Disabled The
81. 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 2 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 3 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 4 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 5 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 6 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 Exp 7 1 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 Exp 8 1 8 30 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation Zone Connections Any zones that are not being used must be linked out or programmed as Not Used see page 48 for details When using End Of Line wiring only 1 device should normally be connected to each zone A zone short can be programmed for Active or Tamper response see page 65 for details End Of Line EOL Use this wiring configuration when connecting normally closed detection devices to the zone using 2 Wires Zone wiring should be programmed as Double Pole EOL see Zone Wiring page 54 Alarm Contact
82. 10 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Setup Users User Options 1 This menu defines which options are available to the user when their code is entered Press O to scroll through the options and press to select them or use keys 1 Letter option IS selected Star option is NOT selected The following options are available A Arming Areas assigned to the selected user can be armed D Disarming Areas assigned to the selected user can be disarmed O Omitting Zones assigned to the same areas as the selected user can be omitted providing that they have the omit attribute assigned to them R Eng Reset Engineers onl Areas programmed as Engineer reset can be reset after an Alarm has occurred a Local Arming The User can only arm areas that the keypad is assigned to d Local Disarm The User can only disarm areas that the keypad is assigned to or areas that are in entry or alarm provided that the code has that area assigned to it Y Auto YES After a User code has been entered pressing the key to confirm the next action is not required F Disarm First If an area is already armed and the selected user enters their code the Disarm option is displayed User Options 2 This menu is only displayed if the Custom User type is selected see page 110 for details This menu defines which options are available to the user when their code
83. 199 Heartbeat g 7manonn m Y Expansion Lef Defaults Texecom iS a o o S S a Fault Tx Rx Rx Fault Tx Rx mm wm mmm wm emm Seel 170 Ti ATA Ri NETWORK 3 Fault Tx e DEET G00 db 2 O ER NETWORK 1 NETWORK Y R 4 3575 NETWORK 1 Texecom PSU Connection Connected to the Texecom Switch Mode Power Supply DO NOT CONNECT THE MAINS SUPPLY TO THE AC INPUT TERMINALS ON THE PCB 2 Battery Connections A 12V rechargeable battery must be connected to these terminals in order to provide continuous system operation in the event of an AC Mains failure see page 19 for details 3 Digicom Power amp Inputs These terminals provide unfused power remote reset and line fault inputs and are normally used for connecting a stand alone communicator to the control panel see page 34 for details 4 Digicom Outputs Outputs 1 to 8 are low current 100mA ve applied and would normally be used when connecting a stand alone communicator to the control panel see page 34 for details Each output is fully programmable see page 78 for details 5 Engineers Keypad A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier access for programming and testing Note When using a keypad as an Engineers keypad the address must be set to 10 see page 22 for details The keypad zones and lid tamper are not monitored 6 Network Data Connections Networks 1 8 provide con
84. 366 Radio Test Set is ideal for surveying a site This handheld unit can check the availability signal strength and interference status of all surrounding Base Stations In addition it will identify the best location for a DualCom GPRS aerial within the building help to avoid sources of interference and can confirm the availability of a GPRS service at the proposed site Where a Nokia Net Mon phone is available and a Vodafone SIM Card is fitted it may be used in the same manner as the CS2366 Radio Test Set Alternatively a Vodafone mobile phone may be used to locate the point of strongest signal The signal strength indicator is normally a bar or line at the side of the display on the mobile telephone Note The mobile phone MUST use the Vodafone network A mobile phone that uses a different radio network will NOT show the correct signal strength This mobile phone method cannot provide information on the availability signal strength and interference status of all radio Base Stations in the surrounding area Use of the CS2366 Radio Test Set is recommended When you have identified the point of the strongest signal make a note of this point and use it when installing the Com GSM aerial Remember It is always easier to find the point of strongest signal before the equipment is fitted to a wall Moving aerials cables trunking etc after installation is wasted time and effort Initial Setup Please follow the instruction
85. 6 User Name Text Each user can be assigned up to 8 characters of name text The name text is displayed whenever a code is entered and also when reading the log making identification of people using the alarm easier 7 Door Control This option would normally be used for access control Users are able to open unlock doors that are assigned to their user code 8 Proximity TAG As well as or instead of operating the alarm system with a code number it is also possible to operate it by presenting a Proximity TAG to the keypad this requires a Proximity keypad User Types The User type determines which functions are available to the user i e arming disarming etc In addition the User type also determines which options the user can access i e Setup Users etc The following User types are available 0 Engineer Engineers can arm disarm omit zones silence alarms and reset their assigned areas In addition Engineers can access the Programming Menu and all User menu options Engineers can also change their own User codes and assign new users to the system Nore The default Engineer User type User 00 can assign any User types to the system Engineers can only disarm areas that were armed using an Engineer code They cannot disarm any areas that were armed with another User code 1 Master Master users can arm disarm omit zones silence alarms and reset their assigned areas In addition Master users can access all User men
86. 8 Print Log Dat e e ke ev ita 121 Output Group Not Used kisoi b sak 78 Soak Test Areas 24 48 88 168 cscscceesseseeeeesteeeeeeees 121 UU Grouss SY SIGN a oo talk ra 78 goak Tan Areas G40 ic 121 Output Group EES 80 ven Data EE 122 A EE 82 Configure E Re 122 Output Group User Code Emtee 82 Ricochet Diagnostics V2 Only occonccocccnncnnonnanannnnnnonanos 123 Output Group Control Time Een 82 5 10 Programming Part AFM 125 Output Group PC Control ccccseeesseeeeeeesseenseeesseeeeeeees 82 Alter Part Arm cccccsscssneeesssseeessneeeeseeeessneeeessneeeeseee 125 Output Group Door COntroOl rrrrrrrererrraarararasasnnasanononnn 82 5 11 Ricochet Lea a ee emear m eneen n ennen nnnnnnn 126 Ee Learning Devices 2 02 0i 2irurrirrrrrrrrrrranarnasnasnasnonannnonn 126 ole UE Access the Learn Menu using the Omit Hot key 126 Custom Output ccssecseeesseesseeeseeeeseeesseeesseesseeesseesssnens Auto Zone EE 126 Zone Group Ourputs Deleting Devices vie kai ee ate dee deg 126 5 7 yore Options eebe 84 6 Specifications Control Panels concen 128 Reset Digi eer iesesebesabsepeonabinasanadeaoosnasatsrasndokoduiassunsonndna Remote EE 131 Start Tet Call 8 Zone Expanders 2 02 0h 0i02rrerrrrrrrrerernaanarnasnasoasnasnannonnon 131 PON NO cnccccnanonncnncnnannn cnn nncn nc nan rn nenes 84 UE andes dae 131 NEE 33 E ET D 132 Digi Optlons AAA adunia nenain isina ianai 89 Warranty 132 Area Acc
87. ACTIVATES whilst the system is ARMED switch 4 is always closed Assign up to 16 Characters of text to each unit to allow easy identification when the output needs to be manually triggered directly from the keypad using the command i e Entrance Light Zone Group Outputs Zone Group Outputs will activate when one or more zones on the control panel are assigned to a Zone Group Zone Group Mimic This output type will become active when a zone assigned to the group goes active or changes state Zone Group Armed This output type will become active when a zone assigned to the group goes active when the area the zones is assigned too is armed INS176 10 83 UDL 8 Digi Option Premier Elite Series Installation Manual s 5 7 UDL Digi Options Reset Digi eg BL ai 1 Se Tons UDBL DiSdi DFticns gt Reset Didi Press RESET to reset the Yes digimodem a confimation tone will be heard This option should be used whenever a plug on communicator is plugged on or removed from the control panel Start Test Call UD but Ortions Reset Didi UD bau OFLions Start Test Call Press O to send a test call or 1 2 or 3 to initiate an upload to a remote computer Comz is Idle Wait Dial Tone ee Baking ISE W S Wait Clear Delas Cam3G6 is Idle When a plug on communicator has been fitted to the control panel This option can be used to send a test
88. Alarm Receiving Centre ARC over an Ethernet IP path GPRS path and PSTN path or a Combination as opposed to using a traditional PSTN lines To connect to the control panel an RS232 Interface is required For the IRIS 400 series this is a modified PC Com JAA 0001 and for the IRIS 600 series is a Chiron Tex 600 lead The TTL connection is made to either Com1 or Com 2 on the Control panel PCB Layout Chiron IRIS 400 Series Aux Relay Outputs Voltage ORAS 9L SL PLEL 6 o men SLANI sin Ethernet OV for Pin Inputs Pin Inputs Serial RS232 SIM Card Antenna Mo MM O Chiron IRIS 600 Series Voltage 8 V AOATL O Ethernet Serial RS232 8 Antenna SIM Card va 23m Aux an Voltage AA VOISUIAIA Mas A A B B RELAYS L SAS JE PC Com Modification Cut the DB9 Male end of off the PC Com and wire as follows IRIS RS232 DB9 Female Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 5 Tex600 Lead 00000 300mm Programming For both Alarms and Wintex upload download the following should be programmed UDL DIGI Options For full details on the options listed please see page 85 to 95 Program Digi Arc 1 Protocol i e Fast Format Contact ID or SIA level 2 3 Primary No Set this to the IP address of the Monitoring Centre in a 12 digit format 80 176 196 135 080176196135 Secondary No Leave blanks as the IRIS System will receive the second
89. Arm Failed Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 86 Log Cleared Alarm Maintenance Restore Not Reported 401 CL 000 87 iD Loop Shorted Alarm Tamper 145 TA 000 Restore Restore 145 TR 88 Communication Port Alarm Maintenance 000 Restore Restore 000 89 TAG System Exit Batt OK Alarm Not Reported Zone No Restore Not Reported Zone No 90 TAG System Exit Batt LOW Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 91 TAG System Entry Batt OK Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 92 TAG System Entry Batt LOW Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 93 Microphone Activated Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 94 AV Cleared Down Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 95 Monitored Alarm Alarm Alarm 220 BA Zone No Restore Restore 220 BH Zone No 96 Expander Low Voltage Alarm Maintenance 143 ET Device No Restore Restore 143 ER Device No 97 Supervision Fault Alarm Maintenance 355 UT Zone No Restore Restore 355 UJ Zone No 98 PA From Remote FOB Alarm Priority Alarm 121 121 Zone No Restore Restore HA HH Zone No 99 RF Device Low Battery Alarm Maintenance 384 XT Zone User No Restore Restore 384 XR Zone User No 100 Site Data Changed Alarm Maintenance Restore Restore 101 Radio Jamming Alarm Maintenance 344 XQ 000 Restore Restore 344 000 INS176 10 105 UDL amp Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Ma
90. ArmAread Press NO to edit the Part Arm Suite Use the Chime amp Part keys to select the Arm Area Use the Area key to toggle between Areas A to H and to P Use the 1 8 keys to toggle the Areas on amp off The 640 has 4 groups of 16 Arm suites Any number of areas can be assigned to each suite Areas assigned to an Area Arm Suite will be armed when the suite is selected making it easier for the user to select multiple areas if required Example Area Arm Suites could be useful in a domestic situation where the user wants to arm areas A and B at night but does not want to select each area individually e Areas A and B would be assigned to Area Arm Suite 1 e When the user wants to arm the system at night Area Arm Suite 1 would be selected e Areas A and B are automatically selected for arming nore Descriptive text may also be assigned to the Area Arm Suite see page 57 for details Area Arm Suite Controller The suites can be assigned to keypads so that different combinations of areas can be armed or disarmed depending on which keypad is used see page 74 for details and operates as follows e Keypad 1 Area Arm Suite 1 Keypad 2 Area Arm Suite 2 Keypad 3 Area Arm Suite 3 etc When a User code is entered at a keypad one of the Area Arm Suites is selected depending on which keypad was used and the areas contained within that suite arm using the arming mode for
91. B After Entry Areas assigned to FOB After Entry can only be disarmed with a Radio FOB once the Entry procedure has been started Areas not assigned to FOB After Entry can be disarmed with a Radio FOB at any time 33 Armed Coms When Areas are assigned to Armed Coms the system will respond as follows e Communications and outputs Alarm Confirmed etc for ALL areas will only operate when all of the assigned areas are armed When No Areas are assigned to Armed Coms the system will respond as follows e Communications and outputs Alarm Confirmed etc for ALL areas will operate as normal 34 2 Wire Smoke Areas assigned to 2 Wire Smoke will register a Fire Alarm when any 2 Wire Smoke detector activates Areas not assigned to 2 Wire Smoke will not register a Fire Alarm when a 2 Wire Smoke detector activates 35 Faults Eng Reset Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following any Fault Areas Assigned to Faults Eng Reset will respond as follows e The assigned areas can only be reset using an Engineer code If Anti code Reset is enabled option 14 the assigned areas can also be reset using the Anti code Areas not assigned to Faults Eng Reset can be reset with any User code that is valid for those areas 36 No ATS Eng Reset Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following a No ATS Available fault ATS Alarm Transmission
92. CE Installation Manual Premier Elite Series INS176 10 f Texecom Designed to Perform Contents Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Contents EE EE 2 Trouble Shooting sereReEEEEESREEEEEEESEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 42 1 System Oueren 4 Reset and Service Messages ocoonconcnonnccnnacinnnananacinananenase 44 System Architecture ooonncccnnncccnnnnncnnnncncnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnn NEEN 4 5 Programming the Control Panel 45 Control Panel 4 INtrOUUCHION oooocconncccnnonccnnnanoncnannnnnnncrnanaco nan nnc crac rra nn 45 Remote Keypads s cscsssssssssssssssessnsesesesessesesesesnarececsenenens 5 Copying and PastiNQ econo 47 Zone Expandersy 2 cia ccna anna nied 6 Log Off Engineer Output ExpanderS csssssssssssesesesssessssssssecereeeesesesseseseaess 6 Resetting the Engineers Code User 00 eent 47 COMMUNICA OES 0022oreoeroreorooroooooooeosoooooooonoooooonnonoosononnonnon 6 5 1 Zone Setup eeeeeeeeeeeeEEESSEEEEEEEEEEEEeen Other DOEVIC OS ara e eaaeo rea aaa aeaea reacia 6 Ricochet Enabled Devices V2 00 V2 09 R 3 Installation seeeEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEeN 7 Ricochet Enabled Devices V2 10 Later 50 Installation SEQUENGCE sssssssessssesessestseseestssscetsessestneeseeees 7 Learning DeviC8S ocoocccooncnosconancnonccnnaconanonascnnnoranannnanenancnnas 50 Control Panel oli is 7 Auto Zone Type amp Aren EENS 50 Power Supply
93. Chime Mimic This output type activates for 2 seconds when a zone in the selected area with the Chime attribute is activated 39 Chime Enabled This output type activates when Chime is enabled for the selected area and deactivates when Chime is disabled for the selected area 40 DK First Knock This output type activates when a zone in the selected area with the Double Knock attribute is activated for the first time and deactivates when the zone causes an alarm or the Double Knock Delay timer expires 41 BP First Knock This output type activates when a zone in the selected area with the Beam Pair attribute is activated for the first time and deactivates when another zone with the Beam Pair attribute causes an alarm or the Beam Pair Time expires 42 On Test This output type activates when a zone in the selected area with the Test attribute is placed on test and deactivates when the Soak Test Time expires 43 Test Fail This output type activates when a zone in the selected area with the Test attribute is placed on test and fails and deactivates when an Engineer code is entered or the Soak Test Time expires 44 Internal Alarm This output type activates when an Internal alarm occurs in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is cancelled 45 Auto Arming This output type activates when the selected area Auto Arms and deactivates whe
94. E Meni ES Use keys 0 5 to select Press YES to setup an option or use the Press NO to Use keys 0 9 the ComIP Module SCROLL key to search editthe option to enter text Setur IP Data ComIP Adress Folling Address 192165000661 o Ka gt at ue Ba Gen Press YES to setup Press No to edit the Press No to edit the Press No to edit the the IRIS Module Access Point Name User Name User Password y Setur GPRS Data Access Prt Hame User Hame Password ae Lo e E O R Ces Oo Gen Use keys 0 9 to enter the telephone number Cc Press NO to edit the Omit Chime SMS Centre Primary Part 3 second Pause telephone number Area 10 Second Pause The following 6 options SMS Centre Pri 07890123456 will only be seen is a EU Radio Pad or GSM Module is fitted Pad Serial Ko ABBBA 123456 Use keys 0 9 to enter the telephone number Press NO to edit the Omit Chime SMS Centre Secondary Part 3 second Pause telephone number Area 10 Second Pause Fad HUG 1234587 Brs98123456 9123 SMS Centre Sec Press NO to edit the Modem Use keys 0 9 to program text the setup string same way thata mobile phone works CH5H 3 6 6 8 123 Modem Setur Std Press NO to change Use the S CROLL key t
95. Fault ID Fail to Communicate Restore Alarm Restore Maintenance Line Fault ID 00 Download Start Download End Restore Alarm Restore Alarm Not Reported Maintenance Not Reported Maintenance Log Capacity Alert 80 Restore Alarm Not Reported Maintenance Date Changed Restore Alarm Not Reported Maintenance User No Time Changed Restore Alarm Not Reported Maintenance User No Installer Programming Start Restore Alarm Not Reported Maintenance User No Installer Programming End Restore Alarm Not Reported Maintenance User No Panel Box Tamper Restore Alarm Not Reported Tamper 00 Bell Tamper Restore Alarm Restore Tamper 00 Device ID Auxiliary Tamper Restore Alarm Restore Tamper Device ID Device ID Expander Tamper Restore Alarm Restore Tamper Device ID Device ID Keypad Tamper Restore Alarm Restore Tamper Device ID Keypad No Expander Trouble Network Error Restore Alarm Restore Tamper Keypad No Device ID Keypad Trouble Network Error Restore Alarm Restore Tamper Device ID Keypad No Fire Zone Tamper Restore Alarm Restore Tamper Keypad No Zone No Zone Tamper Restore Alarm Restore Tamper Zone No Zone No
96. HO Out of Programming Menu Engineer S tillLogged On INS176 10 45 Programming the Control Panel Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Programming Menu Guide not always available not always available not always available Assign SmartKey Routing User Code User Areas User Type User Options User Config User Time Lock User Text Door Control Add TAG Add SmariKey Key Main Menu Key Sub Menu O Zone Setup Learn Delete Ricochet Device Zone Types Zone Attributes 1 Zone Attributes 2 Zone Areas Zone Text Zone Chime Remote Test Zone Wiring Ricochet Device Mode Area Programming Timers a gt Arming Modes Area Arm Suites Area Suite Text Suite Arm Modes GD Area Options Time Arm Areas Area Text Global Options System Timers a gt System Config System Options Monitor Hardware Control Timers ED System Text Part Arm Text Holiday Dates Speaker Tones PC Output Text Q Custom O P Text Keypad Setup Areas Zone Mapping Options Speaker Volume Sounder Options ED Expander Setup Areas Location Text Auxiliary Input Speaker Volume Sounder Options System Outputs Panel Outputs a gt Digi Outputs Com Channels RedCARE Pins Keypad Outputs ED Expander Outputs Custom Outputs X 10 Outputs UDL Digi Options Reset Digi a gt Test Com Set Call Waiting Program Digi Digi Options GD UDL Options Area Accounts Radio SMS Options Com Port Setup Setup Users Learn Delete Sm
97. HO ERE See ce OOO FRE Soe x CA Ces REP 2 3 Areasi 1 Use the key to switch Hawn ene eee between Area Groups 1 2 3 amp 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Use the Chime amp 1 REP 2 3 Areasii Part keys f ABCDEFGHS dekokakatatak to scroll between i Area Groups 1 2 3 amp 4 l 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Use the Area key to select either A H or IP areas REP 3 Areas i Use the numeric buttons 1 8 to data gt T TK HOP toggle the required areas on or off INS176 10 73 Keypad Setup Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Keypad Areas Keypads can be assigned to any number of areas assigning a keypad to an area determines e Which areas the sounder and speaker output in the keypad will generate tones for i e if the keypad is assigned to areas A and C the sounder speaker will only operate when areas A or C are in alarm entry exit etc e Which areas can be armed or disarmed from that keypad when using codes that have the Local Arming or Local Disarming attributes see page 111 for details e Which areas will cause a Tamper alarm when the keypad cover is removed Keypad Zone Mapping The zones in the keypad need to be mapped to a valid zone number before they can be used as part of the system i e Keypad 1 Zone 1 could be mapped to Zone 5 panel and Zone 2 could be mapped to Zone 25 expander 3 etc l gt d Until mapped the zones in the keypads will not work A keypad zone can b
98. I AT 7 eee A asi En d meat dent Y wea 7 kenn d ng meee Gd EEN 7 ke d Area 0 F atat F Sen Y ken DEEN BEEN DH Y Barve farce Tanger kim Account No should match the ARC Site Chip ID and tick the relevant trigger event boxes relevant to the premises D Connect Via IP Checked e Protocol SIA Level2 3 Radio Pad and Com Port Options Corman Optone gt wu s Cetina AECH 42804 are Cam Pwt Opasne aci wi ac GET KWE D maman ran Gan twa Ia maa e Ae gt Jamie A Com Pt 2 Toten re on Ga Gana more ane AV Dei Atento 3 Matin Di A n AV aed Otar 0 wun Vann DA P san If the SMS call centre is utilised the engineer should enter the appropriate number and it should be configured under SMS Call Centre 1 amp 2 The SMS centre telephone number is used to send SMS text messages to mobile phones Default 07860980480 Com IP Details Com IP Details Local IP Address 127 000 000 001 Local IP Port 50562 Gateway 127 000 000 001 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 w Polling SMG IP Address Name SMG Port 50561 NOTE if the panel is being programmed with a laptop on com port 2 and the WebWay is connected to com port 1 the SPT will be lost from the panel until the Wintex session is closed INS176 10 99 UDL 8 Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Chiron IRIS The Chiron IRIS Touch range of communicators offers a way of transmitting alarm signals to an
99. Installation Manual Area Programming which activation of a further two zones that are not on the entry route must occur before the Alarm Confirmation output will activate Areas not assigned to Conf After Entry will never report Confirmed Intruder alarm events to the Alarm Receiving Centre after the entry delay has expired DA To comply with DD 243 areas must NOT be assigned to this option thus preventing Confirmed Intruder Alarms from being reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre after the entry delay has expired If a Portable ACE i e Electronic Keyswitch Key fob Tag Swipe Card etc is used to disarm the system it is permissible for the Confirmed Intruder Alarm signal to be re enabled after the entry delay has expired In this case areas CAN be assigned to Conf After Entry 30 Part Arm Enabled Areas assigned to Part Arm Enabled can be Part Armed Areas not assigned to Part Arm Enabled cannot be Part Armed 31 Bell Squawk Areas assigned to Bell Squawk will respond as follows e When all of the assigned areas are fully armed the bell will activate once for 2 seconds when any one of the assigned areas are disarmed the bell will activate twice for 2 seconds and when any one of the assigned areas are disarmed following an alarm the bell will activate five times for 2 seconds Areas not assigned to Bell Squawk will not activate the Bell output when arming or disarming 32 FO
100. Intruder Alarm signal to be re enabled after the entry delay has expired The following two options have been provided to ensure that the control panel can be programmed to comply with this standard if required WARNING Owing to the ability to disable ALL of the confirmation facilities the customer should be advised in writing by the alarm company that ALL means of alarm confirmation are disabled when the initial entry door is opened The alarm company should then obtain written acceptance from the customer of the disabling of the means of alarm confirmation 28 Confirm in Entry Areas assigned to Confirm in Entry will respond as follows e Ifthe entry mode is started for the selected area and a Confirmed Intruder alarm occurs in that area Confirmed Intruder alarm events for that area are reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre Areas not assigned to Confirm in Entry will never report Confirmed Intruder alarm events to the Alarm Receiving Centre during the entry mode DA To comply with DD 243 areas must NOT be assigned to this option thus preventing Confirmed Intruder Alarms from being reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre during the entry mode 29 Conf after Entr Areas assigned to Conf After Entry will respond as follows e Alarm confirmation is ONLY disabled for the duration of the Entry Time and is RE ENABLED once the Entry Time has expired after 60 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series
101. N A N A N A MA N A NA Premier Elite Exp 1 Exp2 Exp 1 Exp2 N A NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Expander Address 1 5 1 5 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A a lite Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 1 Exp 2 Expander Address 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 Example 2 Premier Elite 168 32XP W 8XP W s amp 8XP s mix Network 1 Network 2 Panel Expanders Wireless Expanders Mixed Premier Elite 168 32XP W 2 x 8XP W 8XP W 8XP W 8XP Expander Address 1 5 amp 6 1 2 3 Devices Max 32 16 8 8 8 Premier Elite SmartKey Max 16 Example 3 Premier Elite 48 32XP W 8XP s Panel 16 16 Network 1 16 N A Expanders Mixed Premier Elite 48 2 x 8XP Expander Address 5 amp 6 Devices Used 16 Premier Elite SmartKey Max N A 24 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation 8XE Zone Expander 24 Only The 8XE Zone Expander has e 8fully programmable zones e Aus 12V Output Expander Layout E Texecom gt Connector for plugging on JP5 control panel Spas ps aka l a O 29 210 DIE 212 z13 zi4 z15 z16 or Zones 9 16 or Aux
102. Output System outeut gt 13 gt System Ture Ces Type e g 13 gt SS en ren Use keys 1 8toselect an area use the AREA key ER le between areas o Didi Outrut 3 Enter Output Areas 11 Diatetetek to togg Areas 1 Sheet Yes Type e g 06 Fire Alarm Cres A to H and to P 168 only Fire Alarm Cres for 640 see above Didi Output Enter Zone igi MO Lib 5 Enter Zone Type igi Le UE Cres Number e g 011 gt Welt e g 2 alarm GE Ces E E ge EE Digi Outrut 3 Enter Timer 1191 Outeyt 3 y Control Timer Number e g 7 gt Get Timer ras Ces Enter PC Control Number e g 4 Didi Output 3 PC Control Enter Door Control Number e g 4 Digi Output 3 Door Control Digi Outrut 3 System Dren To P rogram the Output Attributes if Required g lIteut 2 eben 4 Ces Baer Press NO to Use keys 1 8 to select Press No to edit the anattribute or use the select deselect attributes SCROLL key to search the attribute Inverted RI dodo Inverted aka kk ok k k oh User Test Pk ok ok k k k Press YES to Acceptand move to Press NO to If X 10 Outputs are being programmed y 47 16 Outrut 3 House A Unit ai edit the House amp Unit Numbers Use keys 0 9 to select a House Number or use the SCROLL key to search the Unit Number Then use keys 0 9 to select a House Numb
103. Radio Pad fitted GSM Signal GSM BER Turn Outputs On Turn Outputs Off Send Message System Status 222 status Output Status What will be sent in the Text Message The following information will be received in the text message My Home Name programmed into phone 3 Western Road Upto16characters oftext this is the Printer Header 12 45 58 01 12 TimeandDate Zone003Alarm EventType TheDetectorin the Lounge l Zone Username text Areathatcausedtheevent Alarm Reporting 8 Upload Download via IP IP Mode panel port programmed as ComIP fixed IP SIM card 1 Enter Engineers Programming mode and select UDL Digi Options then select Com Port Setup Ensure Com Port is programmed as ComiP Leave the IP address port gateway blank 2 Now select the Digi Options menu and make sure that Digi Option 1 is programmed for Digi is Enabled 3 Now select Program Digi and ensure the following options are programmed for one of the ARC options a Protocol Program as required b Account No Program as required c Dialling Attempts Program as required d Report Areas Program as required e Reports Program as required D Config Program as required g Protocol Options Program as required h For Upload Download via Wintex edit the Account Panel Details and fill in the IP address you have been given and Port number All three status LED s shoul
104. RatinQS ooo 18 Deleting Devices Connecting AC Mains 19 EIER Connecting Batterles ENEE 19 Zone Attributes 1 Connecting Devices to the Network 20 Zone Attributes 2 ccsessessseseessseeesensseesseeesseensensseensaees Remote Keypads s csssccssssssessesssssssessssesscsessessesessesseeatess 22 Attributes for Moment or Latch Keys HEEN 23 Attributes for CUStOM ZONES EE System Design Considerations aaavareroeeoeesoasonassoonn 23 Zone Areas 12 24 48 88 168 a arrrrrrerroroonooeosoosoosoonoononn Ricochet V2 Expander Addressing een 24 Zone Areas 640 sccccccssesseeseesseesseseeeseessessessaneseessenseesaees 8XE Zone Expander 24 Only sssssssssssssseeeeseseeessesensaees 25 Zone Text 8XP Zone Expander se Zone Chime Star and Daisy Jumper Option 26 Remote Test Enable ooonnnnnnnccnnnniccnnnannccnnnnnnnnnacrnanaccnnnacc cnn iProx Module 27 Zone Wiring emccccnannonannenannnannnenacne narnia reses GOIXD Zone Expander sscsceceerersrsssesssssrneneeeeeenenseneeaees 27 Zone Groups OP16 Output Expander 27 IEN RM8 Relay Module cssccsssssesessesseesesseeseeseeneseeas 28 5 2 Area Programming sssscsssssssneesssees 55 Zone and Output Numbering 24 48 88 168 varrresrre 29 EE EE 55 Zone and Output Numbering 640 mociones 30 Arming E 56 Zone Connections Area Arm Suites 24 48 88 168 EE 56 GOIXD Zone O 32 Area Arm Suites 640 0 vrvrrrreererereoanonsnsosososonasesononsnsn
105. Resistor 4K7 EOL Resistor 2K2 1 Normally Closed Device 2 Normally Closed Devices Note When using this configuration no more than 3 detectors can be connected to each zone Double Pole Use this wiring configuration when connecting normally closed or normally open detection devices to the zone using 4 Wires Zone wiring should be programmed as Double Pole EOL see Zone Wiring Triple End Of Line TEOL Use this wiring configuration when connecting PIR devices with that require Anti Mask and Fault detection Several zone wiring programming options are available for this Triple EOL is illustrated below See Zone Wiring on page 54 Alarm contact resistor 4K7 Fault contact resistor 2K2 EOL resistor 2K2 1 Normally Closed Device with Fault and Mask Mask Fault Alarm Note When using this configuration only 1 detector can be connected to each zone Note Alternative resistor values are available see Zone Wiring on page 54 for more details Normally Open Or Normally Closed Circuits This wiring configuration is normally used for key switches with a N O page 54 A T SASS Zone 1 Zone 1 1 Normally 2 Normally Closed Contact Closed Contacts Note When using this configuration no more than 10 detectors can be connected to each zone NAO RERE CA AAA H Zone 1 Normally Open Contact Zone 1 Nor
106. SU Monitor the system will respond as follows Tamper 12V Fail Battery Fail A C Fail Resistance Response Closed Closed Closed Closed OR No Faults Closed Closed Closed Open 2K2 AC Fail Closed Closed Open Closed 4K7 Battery Fail Closed Closed Open Open 6K9 Battery Fail AC Fail Closed Open Closed Closed 10K 12V Fail Closed Open Closed Open 12K2 AC Fail 12V Fail Closed Open Open Closed 14K7 Battery Fail 12V Fail Closed Open Open Open 16K9 AC Fail Battery Fail 12V fail Open O C Lid Tamper INS176 10 35 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Plug on Communicators The Com300 is a multi format 8 channel digital communicator 300 baud modem for use with a standard analogue telephone line The Com2400 is a multi format 8 channel digital communicator 2400 baud modem for use with a standard analogue telephone line in addition this modem can also send Short Message Service SMS text messages to a mobile phone These Communicators can be used to report system events to an Alarm Receiving Centre using Fast Format Contact ID or SIA Level II or to upload download control panel information using the Wintex UDL software and a PC Plugging on the Communicator Ensure that the board is the correct way up see below Locate the plug into the communicator socket on the control panel and line up the mounting holes with the pillars in the base On
107. Strike Door Strike users have no access to User functions or Menu options However Door Strike users will activate any outputs programmed as Door Strike whenever their code is entered see page 81 for details 8 Vacation Vacation users behave the same way as Standard users However Vacation users will automatically be deleted the first time that the Master User code User 01 is used to disarm the system Nore Vacation user can only be deleted by the Master user after it has been used to disarm the system at least once 9 Custom Custom users can access any functions and User menu options that have been assigned to them in User Options 1 or 2 and User Config This flexibility allows new User types to be created that have their own unique set of characteristics Any number of Custom users can be assigned to the system and each one will respond differently depending on the functions and features that have been assigned to them INS176 10 109 Setup Users Premier Elite Series Installation Manual User Functions and Options The table below shows the options that are available to each user NOTE Counts All users have access to the User Menu have the ability to View Event Log Adjust Volumes and Print Event Log User Options 1 All users that have access to the Arming Menu have the ability to View Zone Status Set Chime Areas View Act Faults and View A
108. System Areas Assigned to No ATS Eng Reset will respond as follows e The assigned areas can only be reset using an Engineer code If Anti code Reset is enabled option 14 the assigned areas can also be reset using the Anti code Areas not assigned to No ATS Eng Rst can be reset with any User code that is valid for those areas 37 AC Fail Eng Reset Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following an AC Mains Fail Areas assigned to AC Fail Eng Reset will respond as follows e The assigned areas can only be reset using an Engineer code If Anti code Reset is enabled option 14 the assigned areas can also be reset using the Anti code Areas not assigned to AC Fail Eng Reset can be reset with any User code that is valid for those areas 38 Mask When Armed Areas assigned to Mask When Armed will register a Masking fault when the selected areas are armed and a Masking Fault occurs Areas not assigned Mask When Armed will never register a Masking fault when the selected areas are armed and a Masking Fault occurs INS176 10 61 Area Programming Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Time Arm Area Area Een Area Programming Timers Use the SCROLL key to selectan area or Group amp Area Use keys 1 8 to select a timer e g 5 Timer 5 Area E Armed ba timer D Press YES to select the disarmed by timer Use keys 1 8toselect
109. Telephone cable Type 1 0 5mm CW1308 This terminal must be connected to 4m i the incoming AC Mains earth supply Com300 T or R Com2400 T1 R1 gt To other telephone m extension sockets SSSSS Com GSM The Premier Elite Com GSM is a 2G module that can be connected to any Premier Elite control panel however functionality differs depending on the type of Premier panel installed and the type of SIM card that is used The tables below show which features are available and the type of SIM card required to enable the services Premier Elite 24 48 88 168 amp 640 SIM Type Panel Port Type Dynamic fi GSM Feature IP Fixed IP Module Com IP Report system events alarms arm disarm etc via text Y x Y x messaging to mobile telephones Remotely arm disarm and obtain current status of the alarm system Y x Y x via text messaging Upload Download Via GSM Y x Y x Alarm reporting to IP enabled receivers Montex for example Y Y x Y GPRS Upload Download Via IP GPRS Y Y x Y NOTE A secondary form of communications should be used as back up where possible NOTE When using Alarm reporting over IP with Montex SIA Contact ID or Fast Format may be used however if using Texbase SIA is NOT supported Some receivers may require a Fixed IP address please check with your provider NOTE The Com port type must be programmed as one or the other it is not pos
110. This address provides the information needed to forward packets on the local network and across multiple networks if necessary IP addresses are specified as x x x x where each x is a number from 1 to 254 for example 192 168 0 200 The ComiP must be assigned a unique IP address to use on a TCP IP network H the address is left blank or is programmed as 0 0 0 0 the Com P module will try to automatically obtain an IP address from a DHCP server if one is running on the network ComiP Port The port number used to identify the channel for remote initiated connections The default setting is 10001 The range for port settings is 1 65535 except for the following reserved ports Port Numbers Reserved for 1 1024 Reserved well known ports 9999 Telnet setup 14000 14009 Reserved 30718 Reserved 10000 10999 Recommended for raw socket connections ComiP Gateway The gateway address or router allows communication to other LAN WAN segments The gateway address should be the IP address of the router connected to the same LAN segment as the ComIP The gateway address must be within the local network ComiP Netmask A netmask defines the number of bits taken from the IP address that are assigned for the host section The default mask is 255 255 255 0 8 bits USB Com The USB Com has two connectors The USB connector is for connection to a USB port on a computer and the Molex connector plugs onto a
111. Use keys 0 9 to enter the SL rop Zone BAG required device number or use the SCROLL key to search e 4 e g 23 Device 23 23 Ho Device Z6 A DES wa Leer If Device already programmed ID will show here Press YES to learn Radio Device If Device already programmed ID will show here 23 Ho Device 18 Activate Device Press Learn switch and ins ert battery Po wer Press RESET to Delete up SmartKey Radio Device 23 ID4DDJCZ TAMP S5L 685 Zone 000 Press NO to map the device to a zone user z ID4DD3C3 OK L 685 Zone Ba Use keys 0 9 to enter the required zone user number or use the SCROLL key to search e g 18 Zone 18 ID4DDSC3 Dk FOSS Zone 019 Top Line Serial number and status ofdevice Bottom Line Signal strength and zone user number 23 ID4DD3C3 OK 5L 6853 Zone 818 Configuring Radio devices NOT V2 Systems Up to 32 wireless devices can be learnt on to the system this can be any combination of detectors mag contacts and remote FOBs The number of remote FOBs is limited to the maximum number of devices the expander can accept Wireless devices can then be mapped on to the system along with conventional detectors The top line on the display shows the serial number of the device and also the status i e Active Tamper etc The bottom line of the display shows the signal streng
112. Use keys 1 8 to selectan area eg 4 D gt Dcklickakk lt rr Yes Area Options 640 dese Be Area Programming Timers Ares Programming Area OFbions Use the Scroll Key to select the option Use the Area key to select the Arm Area 1 4 Press NO to edit the option Use the Chime amp Part keys to select the Arm Area Use the Area key to toggle between Areas A to H and to P Use the 1 8 keys to toggle the Areas on amp off 58 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Area Programming These options control how various features affect each area Any number of areas can be assigned to each option 00 Auto Part Arm Areas assigned to Auto Part Arm will fully arm if an Entry Exit zone is activated during the exit mode and will Part Arm 1 if an Entry Exit zone is not activated during the exit mode Areas not assigned to Auto Part will always fully arm 1 Part Arm Instant Areas assigned to Part Arm Instant will arm instantly when part arming Areas not assigned to Part Arm Instant will use the area exit timer when part arming 2 Part Arm Silent Areas assigned to Part Arm Silent will never generate Exit tones when part arming Areas not assigned to Part Arm Silent will always generate Exit tones when part arming 3 Remote Arm Areas assigned to Remote Arm can be
113. Ze to the Prox sym RAN the liserBBz Area gt 1 1 i s a IMPORTIHG TAG keypad and a beep will be heard PptotokatototokC ikek i Present TAG How i Use the Chime amp ECD Parteys e to scroll between li Area Groups 1 2 3 8 4 liserGGz Area gt 1 Deco okka Use the Area key to select either Ni AH or FP areas Use the numeric buttons 1 8 to toggle the required areas on or off Zone 061 Arsasl Soo gt T JELMHOF j 108 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Setup Users Default User Codes When the control panel is first powered up and the factory default settings are loaded see page 42 for details only the Engineer code and the Master User code exist The Factory default Engineer User code is TOD Ga nore The Engineer is always User 00 If the Engineer code has been lost or forgotten it can normally be reset back to the factory default without having to reprogram the entire system see page 47 for details Resetting the Engineer code is only possible if the NVM has not been locked see page 65 for details The Factory default Master User code is Gu Gus Gad Bud Nore The Master User is always User 01 If the Master User code has been lost or forgotten it can be reprogrammed by the Engineer in this menu Programming New Users Each User code on the system is made up of the following elements Items 1 2 or 8 3 and 4 which are es
114. a signals are boosted between the expander and the previous device This mode will allow expanders on the network to be connected up to 250m apart and MUST only be selected if the expander has one device connected to the network IN connections Star wiring example Control Panel 100m Max Max To next device IN DEIS 8XP Expander To next device IN OUT DEES 8XP Expander Daisy chain wiring example Control Panel 250m Max 250m Max 250m Max 100m Max IN OUT DOS 8XP Expander IN or DES 8XP Expander IN OUT Dems 3 Hen 8XP Expander 8XP Expander 8XP Expander Zone Numbering 24 48 88 168 The table below shows the zone allocation when the expanders are installed Zones Zones Network 1 Address Network 2 73 80 81 88 89 96 97 104 105 112 113 120 121 128 129 136 Nore Network 2 can only be used on the 168 E NOTE For 640 see page 30 24 48 88 168 640 48 88 168 640 only 88 168 amp 640 only Expander Auxiliary Input The expander has one programmable input This auxiliary input can be used to monitor auxiliary devices such as tamper loops etc Wire as per Aux Tamper shown on page 32 see page 76 for details The system will respond as follows Input Status OV Applied OV Removed System Response Input Secure Input Active EOL Various ie gt d For further details on how
115. a timer e g 3 Timer 3 and Disarm D bu timer 3 A and Disarm D bu Liner 3 Yes The alarm system as a whole or any number of individual areas can be automatically armed or disarmed using the built in control timers The 24 has 2 independent control timers the 48 has 4 independent control timers the 88 768 have 8 independent control timers and the 640 has 8 independent control timers for each of the 4 Area groups These may be configured to switch on and off at different points of the day and operate on different days of the week see page 69 for programming details Area Text ee lee rea ranmina Area Programmina Lers Ares Programmina Area Text gt Use keys 1 8 to select an Area or use the SCROLL key to search e g 4 Press NO to edit the Area text Edit Text gt ABL Recertion Edit Tex Use keys 0 9 to program text the same way thata mobile phone works ABC Text may be assigned to each of the areas on the system This allows the user to select the areas by description instead of a letter A maximum of 16 characters can be programmed for each of the areas Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones Select characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate number of times to select a character on the same key press to move the cursor along 62 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Global Optio
116. activate when an alarm occurs in those areas Areas not assigned to Bell amp Strobe op will never cause the Bell Strobe output on the control panel to activate when an alarm occurs in those areas 10 Alarms Eng Reset Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following an Intruder alarm Areas Assigned to Alarms Eng Reset will respond as follows e The assigned areas can only be reset using an Engineer code If Anti code Reset is enabled option 14 the assigned areas can also be reset using the Anti code Areas not assigned to Alarms Eng Reset can be reset with any User code that is valid for those areas 11 Confirmed Reset Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following a Confirmed alarm Areas Assigned to Confirmed Reset will respond as follows e The assigned areas can only be reset using an Engineer code NOTE f Anti code Reset is enabled option 14 the assigned areas can also be reset using the Anti code Areas not assigned to Confirmed Reset can only be reset with any User code that is valid for those areas providing that Alarms Eng Reset option 14 is also programmed for user reset 12 Tamper Eng Reset Each area can be programmed for Engineer or User reset following a Tamper alarm when the area is unarmed Areas assigned to Tamper Eng Reset will respond as follows e The assigned areas can only be reset using an Engine
117. ad sounder speaker E Entry Tones On Entry tones will be generated by the keypad sounder speaker X Exit Tones On Exit tones will be generated by the keypad sounder speaker C Chime Tones On Chime 1 2 and 3 tones will be generated by the keypad sounder speaker K Use Keypad Areas When selected the keypad sounder and arming control is determined by the area that the keypad is assigned to When deselected the keypad becomes an Area Arm Suite controller see page 56 for details This allows different combinations of areas to be armed or disarmed depending on which keypad is used and operates as follows e Keypad 1 Area Arm Suite 1 Keypad 2 Area Arm Suite 2 Keypad 3 Area Arm Suite 3 etc e When a User code is entered at a keypad one of the Area Arm Suites is selected depending on which keypad was used and the areas contained within that suite arm using the arming mode for that suite the keypad sounder will also follow the areas defined by the suite 74 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Expander Setup 5 5 Expander Setup Use keys 1 8 to selectan expander and press 0 to toggle between networks e g 3 Network 1 Keypad 5 Exe 1 1 Areas a to the left of the device number Heen ee indicates thatthe device is fitted Use keys 1 8 to select an area e g 2 B Press NO Use the area key to toggle between areas to editthe A to H and to P expander areas F
118. ad Zone Mapping ccsscsscsseseessesseeseeseesseeseeeas Connecting a Computer 41 Keypad Options cccscssseesssessssssesesessesseseseesesersesenenees Connecting a Printer scssesseserseseseseeseesesensesserseeaes 41 Keypad Speaker Volume 4 Commissioning and Troubleshooting 42 Keypad Sounder Options Commlssloning EEN 42 5 5 Expander Setup een 2 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Contents Expander Areas ccsesccssseeseseesesseeessseeeseneeeesseeeensseeees 76 View Exp Status cion aaa 119 Expander Location Text ccssscssseessseesssseeesssnesssseeees 76 Set System Time cccscccseecssreeseeeseeesseeseseesseeeseeesseeeesneees 119 Expander Auxiliary Input ccssssesssseesesseeesssneeessseeees 76 Set System Date ccsccssscesseesseessnesseeesnnerseeeesteeseneess 119 Expander Speaker Volume s ccsseeeseeseeeeseeesseeseeeseeeneees 76 Change Eng Code sscssscsssessesseesseeseseesseeeseeessenenseeeas 120 Expander Sounder Options ooooocccoccnnncnnnnonnnnnnnnannnnonancnnns 76 Adjust VolumeSet eiiean aena iaasa rra cn nana 120 5 6 System Outputs Ee 77 Default NVM DAIA 00000rrrrorreeoororrononoronasonnononsonanasonnonasonnn 120 Available OUtPUtS s s 1 1 1 1 1o1orororororoiorororeaeneneaoaenonenenenenenant 78 Location TON EE 120 Programming OUtpUIS 0 202vrretreertrereaeasoasanasensosonnasonnanonn 7
119. ad and fit a jumper link across the two pins 14 Com Port 3 Com Port 3 is a serial communications port and can be used for connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the control panel see page 95 for details 15 Plug on RedCARE Dualcom Connections These pins provide connections for a plug on RedCARE Dualcom Digicom or RM8 Relay module Each output is fully programmable see page 78 for details Note When a device is plugged on to these pins not all outputs may be available please refer to the relevant documentation for details 16 NVM 1 8 2 All system programming data and the event log is stored in one or two non volatile memory devices 17 Flash Upgrade Port For use with the Flasher interface to update panel firmware 16 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation 18 Communication Ports 18 2 Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the control panel see page 95 for details Com Port 2 is a serial communications port and can be used for connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the control panel see page 95 for details 19 Expansion The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone Expander see page 32 for details or an AV Module see page 40 for details X 10 Module ora Memory Module 20 Load Defaults Button Press and hold this
120. adio Step 1 Zone When configuration option 48 is programmed as Radio 2 Step Arm the second step of the arming procedure is the activation of any zone programmed as Guard Access Radio Step 2 RKP When configuration option 48 is programmed as Radio 2 Step Arm the second step of the arming procedure is confirmation via the keypad 50 Conf Hold Up EN Once a PA zone is activated the hold up timer is started See Global System Timers for Confirmed PA Timer the confirmed alarm will generate if one of the following happens another PA Zone activated or a tamper from a device multi action PA or a global tamper within the timer period No Conf Hold Up No confirmed hold up will be generated 51 Max Log msgs 3 Log events from individual sources are limited to 3 No Max Log msgs Log events from individual sources are not limited to 3 52 Code Entry Timed When 10 failed code attempts have been made the keypad will lock out for 90 seconds If the panel is grade 2 a further 10 failed code entry attempts the will keypad will locked out for 90 seconds If the panel is grade 3 then after every single failed code entry attempt the keypad will lock out for 90 seconds After 21 failed code entry attempts the code tamper alarm is generated and logged No code Ent Time Failed code entry attempts will not lock out keypads or generate a code tamper 53 Enable PD6662 2010 The panel will be defaulted to operate acc
121. akers should not be connected in the same multi core as the iD loop Biscuit Connections Each iD biscuit is identified by its own number 01 to 30 and contains its own internal sensor that is continuously monitored by the expander module The diagram below shows the connections to the biscuit for monitoring both tamper and alarm contacts LOOP iD Biscuit Tamper Biscuit iD Yellow LOOP When the tamper switch is opened the iD biscuit is taken offline and a tamper condition is generated by the control panel If the alarm switch is opened the biscuit s internal sensor changes state and the control panel will see this as an active condition and will respond as appropriate The diagram below shows the typical wiring of a biscuit to a standard PIR oO oO EI Bed Black Blue Yellow From Expander To next detector ID is a registered trade mark of Chloride Safety System Limited 32 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation Auxiliary Fault Connections The Aux Fault terminals allow the control panel to monitor the tamper 8 fault loops of external devices such as power supplies etc Aux Aux Fault Fault A 2 Normally 1 Normally Closed Conta cts Closed Contact Note f the Aux Fault terminals are not being used they must be linked out Speaker Connections This output can be used for driving up to one 16Q or
122. artKey Main Menu x 2 Sub Menu Engineer Utils View Event Log Do Bell Test Do Walk Test View Zone Status System Tests Confirm Devices View RKP Status View Exp Status Set System Time Set System Date Location Text Print Log Data Soak Test Areas Change Eng Code Adjust Volumes Default NVM Data View iD Data Configure Radio Ricochet Diag Part Arm 1 Part Arm 2 Part Arm 3 Ricochet Learn Arming Menu DOM OOMOOOOOOOHHOHOHHOOH HOO Learn Devices Delete Devices Exit Menu Arm System Part Arm System Silent Arming Omit Zones Cancel Exit Disarm Areas Use Anti code View Zone Status Omit 24Hr Zones Set Chime Areas View Act Faults View Act Counts Send SMS Text Defer Arming User Menu GGGGGGGGGCBDOBONCOBGGGGOADN HGOOE Exit Menu View Event Log Change Code Edit Chime Zones System Tests Walk Test Enable Engineer Set System Time Set System Date Override Timers Alter Timers Setup Users Alter Part Arms Call Remote PC Alter Hol Dates Adjust Volumes Print Event Log Edit Phone No s Exit programming menu engineer still logged on Log Off Engineer 46 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Programming the Control Panel Programming Text Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones Characters are selected by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate number of times to select a character on the same key press
123. ary number from the Monitoring Centre Secure Apps platform Account Number Enter in the account number from the Monitoring Centre 4or 6 digits Dialler Attempts Leave as the default 3 Report options The Reporting Options will change depending on the alarm format selected please set up the various reporting option for the Alarm event you wish to send to the Monitoring Centre Config Enable the Connect via IP Key press 7 Digi Options Enable the Digi key press 1 you should now see E on option screen now UDL Options UDL Password Must match the UDL password in Wintex Setup Modules Setup IP Data 1 ComIP Address for the IRIS e g 192 168 0 10 2 ComIP Port 3 ComIP Gateway e g 192 168 001 001 NOTE To use DHCP leave the ComiP Address A Gateway blank ComIP Netmask Enter the network subnet mask i e 255 255 255 000 Polling SMG IP Set this to the IP address of the Monitoring Centre in a 12 digit format ie 80 176 196 135 080176196135 Com Port Setup Com Port 1 Set to IRIS IP Module GPRS Info To programme the APN and the User Name amp Password please see page 94 To programme and commission any other features of the IRIS units please refer to the Chiron IRIS installation manual 100 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL amp Digi Options Zone Alarm Reporting Codes The Reporting codes for Contact ID and SIA are fully configurable however these codes can only be changed
124. ase refer to the relevant documentation for details 16 Flash Upgrade Port For use with the Flasher interface to update panel firmware 17 Battery Kick start Button When powering up the panel without AC Mains present this button must be pressed in order to connect the battery Note f AC Mains is present this button does not need to be pressed 14 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation 18 Communication Ports Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the control panel see page 95 for details Com Port 2 is a serial communications port and can be used for connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the control panel see page 95 for details 19 Network Data Indicators The red LED indicates that data is flowing out of the control panel and normally flashes very quickly The green LED indicates that data is flowing into the control panel and normally flashes slowly the green LED flashes faster as more devices are connected see page 20 for details NOTE For a complete list of factory defaults see the Quick Reference Guide supplied with your panel 20 Load Defaults Button Press and hold this button whilst applying power to the control panel to load the factory default settings Press and hold this button for 7 seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Enginee
125. ata network standard 7 0 2 alarm cable e 4independent areas each with 3 part arms e Up to 8 keypads and 8 zone expanders e 4areaarm suites e Up to 4 output modules e 50 programmable User codes e 8 independent areas each with 3 part arms e 500 Event Log time 8 date stamped e 8 area arm suites e 2 programmable panel outputs 2 x 1A e 100 programmable User codes e 2 5 Amp power supply e 1000 Event Log time 8 date stamped e 5 programmable panel outputs 4 x 1A amp 3A relay 4 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual System Overview e 2 5 Amp power supply Premier Elite 168 e 8fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones e Expandable to 168 zones via keypads and zone expanders e 2x 4 wire data network standard 7 0 2 alarm cable e Up to 16 keypads and 16 zone expanders 8 per network e Up to 8 output modules 4 per network e 16 independent areas each with 3 part arms e 16 area arm suites e 200 programmable User codes e 2000 Event Log time 8 date stamped e 5 programmable panel outputs 4 x 1A amp 3A relay e 2 5 Amp power supply Premier Elite 640 e Ofully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones e Expandable to 640 zones via keypads and zone expanders e 8x 4 wire data network standard 7 0 2 alarm cable e Up to 64 keypads and 64 zone expanders 8 per network e Up to 64 output modules 8 per network e 64 independent areas each with 3 part arms e 64 area arm suites
126. attribute assigned to the same area is activated within this time window 5 Activity Delay If a zone has the Activity attribute and it is not activated during this timer and Config option 14 has been set to View Act Fault see page 65 for details it will be indicated to the user when they try to arm the system area 6 Abort Delay When an Intruder alarm occurs this timer is started if the area is disarmed within this time window an Abort event will be reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre If the system is disarmed after this period the Abort event is not reported 7 Courtesy Time This timer controls the duration of the Courtesy output type The courtesy output activates whenever a keypad is being used and during the entry mode 8 Defer Arming By If an area tries to Time Arm and a valid User code is entered this timer is started and the Time Arming procedure is postponed When this timer expires the system area will try to arm itself again 5 3 Global Options 9 Auto Arm Dela When an area assigned to Auto Arm Areas is disarmed see page 60 for details this timer is started Every time a detector in that area is activated the timer is restarted If the timer is allowed to expire i e no detectors in the assigned area are activated the area will arm itself 10 Menu Time Out This timer controls the length of time that a user can remain in a menu before
127. ayed as letters through to P 19 Auto Area Select When an Engineers code is entered to gain access to the programming mode ALL Zones and Tampers are disabled i e if any Tampers PA Fire or Medical Alarms are activated NOTHING WILL HAPPEN Man Area Select When an Engineers code is entered to gain access to the programming mode the Engineer will have to select which areas are going to be worked on Note Zones and Tampers are only disabled for the selected areas all other areas will respond to zone activations and tampers as normal 20 Predictive Text When in text editing mode the control panel will automatically select predictive text Manual Text Edit When in text editing mode the control panel will automatically select normal text 21 Short Tamper The control panel will see a zone that is in the short circuit condition as a Tamper Short Active The control panel will see a zone that is in the short circuit condition as Active 22 R R Reset Only When OV is applied to the control panel R R input any areas programmed for anti code reset see page 59 for details that are in alarm will be reset R R Silence RST When OV is applied to the control panel R R input any areas programmed for anti code reset see page 59 for details that are in alarm will be silenced When OV is applied to the R R input a second time the areas will be reset this would normally be used when Audio Verificat
128. be independent power outputs according to EN50131 6 Rated Output Voltage 0 3A charge 1 04 Rated Output Battery Battery Rated Output Amps Arrangement Charge 12h 1x7Ah 0 3A 0 433A Standby and Recharge Times EN50131 1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs Power Supply Type A Rated Input 100V 240V 50 60Hz 1A Rated Output Current 55 C 1 5A MAX 13 8Vdc 2 Mains Terminal Block Fuse 250Vac 3 3 15A Slow Medium Blow Maximum rating of each power output note that these are not considered to be independent power outputs according to EN50131 6 Aux 12V 1 0A Bell Strobe 1 0A Network 1 1 0A Battery 1 6A DC DC 1 0A Standby Current 150mA Output Voltage Range 13 0V to 13 9V Maximum Ripple Voltage 0 5V pk pk Aux 12V 1 0A Bell Strobe 1 0A Network 1 amp 2 1 0A Battery 1 6A DC DC 1 0A Standby Current 125mA Output Voltage Range 13 0V to 13 9V Maximum Ripple Voltage 0 5V pk pk Battery type sealed lead acid up to 18Ah Maximum recharge time 72h Battery Low Voltage Signal 9 5V Power Output Fault signal 10 5V with mains present Deep Discharge protection 8 1V Over voltage protection trigger 16V Fuses F1 1Amp Auxiliary 12V Power fuse F2 1 6 Amp Battery fuse electronic PTC F3 1
129. ber RKP SIL PA A Silent PA alarm 1 8 3 has occurred from keypad number RKP Tamper The cover of keypad has been removed RKP LOST Keypad has been lost from the network RKP LOCKED Keypad has been locked out from too many invalid key presses Site Data Changed Site Data has been changed e g zone has been changed Supervision Fault A Radio device has failed to poll back to the panel within the Supervision Time System Over Voltage The control panel Bell Fuse has failed TAG User has presented their Prox TAG Test Call Passed Manual or Periodical Test Call has passed Test Call Failed Manual or Periodical Test Call has failed TESTED Zone has been tested TEST FAIL Zone has failed its Soak test TAG System Exit Batt OK The system has been put in to exit via tag and battery voltage is ok TAG System Exit Batt Low The system has been put in to exit via tag and battery has low voltage TAG System Entry Batt OK The system has been put in to entry via tag and battery voltage is ok TAG System Entry Batt Low The system has been put in to entry via tag and battery has low voltage TIME Armed Area was armed automatically using one of the control timers TIME CHANGED The control panel Date has been changed TIME Disarmed Area was disarmed automatically using one of the control timers TUBE Alarm Zone programm
130. ble Check the volume is set to the desired level see page 76 for details Zones One or more zones show an alarm e Check that the zone is wired correctly see page 31 for wiring details Communicator The Communicator will not dial e By default the communicator is disabled check that the communicator is enabled see page 89 for details e Check that the telephone line has been correctly wired to the communicator see page 36 for wiring details e Check that the telephone numbers are programmed correctly see page 85 for details e Check that the account numbers are programmed correctly see page 85 for details e Check that the dial attempts are not programmed as zero see page 85 for details e Check that the reporting areas have been programmed correctly see page 78 for details e Check that the reporting options have been programmed correctly see page 78 for details Communicator dials but does not communicate e Check that the telephone numbers are programmed correctly see page 88 for details e Check that the correct protocol is programmed see page 88 for details Operation The system will not allow me to arm e Check that there are no outstanding problems see page 44 for details e Check that there are no outstanding alarms that require resetting e Check that the User code has been programmed to allow arming see page 111 for details e Check that the User code has been assigned to the corre
131. ccess The selected user can access the Enable Engineer option allowing them to authorise Engineer access or Remote UDL access to the system A Add Eng Code Engineers only Only Available to Engineers N NVM Locking Engineers onl Only Available to Engineers User Time Lock This option allows the selected user to be denied access to the system at different times of the day and days of the week When a Control Timer is assigned to a user the User code will not allow access to any functions during the timer On period see page 69 for timer programming The first 4 options 48 or 6 options 88 1768 will lockout the selected user Code and TAG when the corresponding control timer is active The last two options will lock out the selected users TAG T when Custom Output 2 Stage A is active or lock out the selected users Code C when Custom Output 2 Stage B is active This allows conditions to be set up in the custom outputs and then the TAG or Code to be locked out during those conditions i e Custom Output 2 Stage B could be programmed to activate during entry resulting in the code being disabled during the entry period INS176 10 111 Setup Users Premier Elite Series Installation Manual User Name Text Each user can be assigned up to 8 characters of name text This can be beneficial when reading the log as identification of people is made easier See page 47 for details on programming text
132. ce all the holes line up press down gently until the pillars snap into the holes O Texecom O A 2 A 2 Man W E E E E 2244 a E O N O COM NIC op ga d o 2 d opt HARTA Spk Top Right Hand Corner Premier 48 88 168 640 Control Panel Right hand side of PCB Premier 24 12 W 24 W amp 48 W Connection Carefully lift the control panel PCB and fix the COM unit into the space provided with the connection lead attached The red lead should be positioned on the uppermost pin of the COM unit The control panel end of the connector should be attached with the red lead on the left most pin of the digi modem connector 000000006 O ogl RRS Standard Telephone Line Connections A standard telephone line must be connected to the Com300 or Com2400 communicator as shown below Master Ls Socket O L a AUD 3 T 5 or A White Blue ring 2 R 2 or B Blue White ring 1
133. change specification without prior notice Keypads and Expanders are protected by UK amp International Registered Design Registered Design Numbers 2089016 and 3004996 Premier amp Premier Elite are trademarks of Texecom 132 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Notes INS176 10 133 Notes Premier Elite Series Installation Manual 134 INS176 10 Texecom Designed to Perform Texecom Limited Bradwood Court St Crispin Way Haslingden Lancashire BB4 4PW England Technical Support UK Customers Tel 08456 300 600 Calls charged at local rate from a BT landline Calls from other networks may vary International Customers Tel 44 1706 233875 Email techsupport texe com Texecom Limited 2013 Yosia british security industry association Certificate Number FM 35285
134. communicated with the Radio Pad that is connected to the control panel FSS gt 004 Forward Signal Strength RSS gt 050 Reverse Signal Strength This screen displays the Radio Pad Forward FSS and Reverse RSS Signal Strength of the Radio Pad that is connected to the control panel e The FSS value should be greater than or equal to 4 and the RSS value should be greater than or equal to 50 94 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL 8 Digi Options CRC 009 Cyclic Redundancy Check BER lt 009 Bit Error Rate This screen displays the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC and Bit Rate Error BER of the Radio Pad that is connected to the control panel ch The CRC and BER values should be less than 10 GSM Info Signal dBm lt 080 GSM Signal GSM BER lt 004 GSM Bit Error Rate This screen displays the signal strength GSM and Bit Rate Error BER of a GSM Module that is connected to the control panel CS The GSM value should be greater than or equal to 80 and the BER value should be less than 9 Comi1 Monitor Screen This screen allows you to view the data activity of Com1 Press RESET to reset the device connected to this port Com2 Monitor Screen This screen allows you to view the data activity of Com2 Press RESET to reset the device connected to this port Com Port Setup EC BPs def tons UD JD OFtions Reset Didi UD JD Ortions
135. complete Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been locked see page 65 for details For a complete list of factory defaults see the Quick Reference Guide section of this manual 22 Expansion The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone Expander see page 32 for details or an AV Module see page 40 for details X 10 Module or a Memory Module 23 Heartbeat LED Power Light Flashes steadily to indicate that the control panel is functioning correctly If the light is ON or OFF all the time then there could be a problem see page 42 for details 24 Battery Charge Current Selector When using a 7Ah standby battery the charge current selector should be set to 300mA If a 17Ah battery is connected metal cabinet only the selector should be set to the 750mA position 25 Engineers Keypad A portable Engineers keypad can be plugged on here to allow easier access for programming and testing Note When using a keypad as an Engineers keypad the address must be set to 10 see page 22 for details The keypad zones and lid tamper are not monitored F1 F6 Protection Fuses electronic PTC The following fuses are provided e F1 900mA Auxiliary 12V Power fuse electronic PTC e F2 900mA Digicom Power electronic PTC e F3 900mA Network 1 fuse electronic PTC e F4 900mA Bell Strobe fuse electronic PTC e F6 1 6 Amp Battery fuse electronic PTC INS176 10 11
136. condition Mask Alarm Zone has detected a Mask condition Test Failed Zone has activated whilst it has been on soak test Tested OK RESET AREAS AC Off Alarm ALARM ABORT Zone has activated during the walk test Area have been reset using keypad following an Intruder alarm The control panel has detected an AC Mains failure An Open After Alarm Abort has occurred for area ALARM Active Anti Code Reset An Intruder alarm signal has been activated for area A reset has been performed using the Anti code reset procedure AREA Armed Area has been armed AREA Disarmed Area has been disarmed A Exit Error Arm Fail has occurred on area ARMING SUITE Area Arm Suite was used to arm the system ATS FAILED The Communicator has failed to report to the Alarm Receiving Centre ATS FLT Alarm There is a problem with the telephone line AUTO TEST CALL An Automatic test call has been initiated AUX Tamper An Auxiliary Tamper input from device has been activated AV CLEARED by The Audio Verification unit has been cleared down by user BELL Tamper A Bell Tamper input from device has been activated BELL Active The Bell output has been activated for area BELL FUSE Alarm The control panel Bell Fuse has failed BOX LID Tamper The control panel lid has been removed causing a Tamper alarm
137. ct Engineer Master Manager Standard Local Duress Arm Only Door Strike Vacation Custom Arming Arming Arming Arming Arming Arming Arming Arming Disarming Disarming Disarming Disarming Disarming Disarming Disarming Omitting Omitting Omitting Omitting Omitting Omitting Omitting Eng Reset Local Arming 7 7 z Local Disarm S 8 p Disarm First Disarm First Disarm First Disarm First Disarm First Disarm First Disarm First User Menu User Menu User Menu User Menu User Menu User Menu User Menu Eng Program Vacation Door Strike Door Strike Door Strike Call Rem PC Call Rem PC Call Rem PC Duress Code Open Close Open Close Open Close Open Close Open Close Open Close User Config Open Close Open Close Engineer Master Manager Standard Local Duress Arm Only Door Strike Vacation Not Used Change Code Chime Zones Change Code Chime Zones Change Code Chime Zones Change Code Chime Zones Change Code Chime Zones Change Timer Change Timer Change Timer System Tests System Tests System Tests Setup Users Setup Users Eng Access Eng Access Eng Access Eng Access Eng Access Access Access Add Eng code NVM Locking 1
138. ct areas see page 108 for details e If a Local User code is being used see page 111 for details ensure that the keypad being used is assigned to the correct area see page 73 for details The system will not allow me to disarm e Check that the User code has been programmed to allow disarming see page 111 for details e Check that the User code has been assigned to the correct area s see page 108 for details e If a Local User code is being used see page 111 for details ensure that the keypad being used is assigned to the correct area see page 73 for details INS176 10 43 Commissioning and Troubleshooting Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Reset and Service Messages When the system requires attention because of a potential problem the display will show one of three service messages These messages can also be accessed at any time allowing the user to view installer information Note These messages would normally be programmed with the telephone numbers of the installer or the Alarm Receiving Centre see page 70 for details To display the service messages proceed as follows The display will normally show the time and date li i an Tue 86 Mar 26 Press followed by C1_ for the Service message Call Alarm Co for Service Press followed by for the Reset message Call Engineer to Reset System Press followed by for the Anti code message Call ARC Reset System Pre
139. ction Switch 2 ON Legacy Mode OFF Ricochet Switch 3 ON Impaq Contact W Wired Input 2 will report as Tamper default OFF input 2 will report as an Alarm Switch 4 Walk test 12 Address Switch Used to assign the address of the receiver on the premier network 13 RF LED Flashes when transmitting or receiving RF data 14 Tamper Disable Disables the lid and rear tamper 15 Engineer s Keypad LED s Red LED flashes constantly the flash rate increases when data is being transmitted 16 Flash Programming Port Variant dependent for flashing the expander with updated firmware The address range and switch position will depend on which combination of expanders are being used Each 32XP W takes up 4 address slots on the control panel network however the network slots are virtual until devices are assigned to available zones It is possible that if a 32XP W is being used at Address 1 but only 16 devices have been used Address 3 amp 4 are available for hardwired 8XP s or 8XP W s Please see some examples of mixing different types of Expanders on various Elite panels and the addressing requirements Example 1 Totally wireless system s 32XP W Panel Network 1 Network 2 Network 3 Network 4 Network 5 Network 6 Network 7 Network 8 Expanders 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Max Prener Elite Expt Exp2 NA N A NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA SE 1 5 NA NA NA N A NA N A N A NA
140. ctivates when the fault is reset 52 PSU Battery Fit This output type activates when the Auxiliary input type PSU Monitor detects a battery fault and deactivates when the fault is reset 53 WD Test Active This output is activated via remote maintenance software to initiate a diagnostics check on an external sounder with remote test capability and will deactivate after 1 minute INS176 10 79 System Outputs Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Output Group Area Any number of areas can be assigned to each output type Select an output type from the following options 00 Alarm This output type activates when any type of Intruder alarm occurs in the selected area and deactivates when the Intruder alarm is reset 01 Guard Alarm This output type activates when a zone programmed as Guard causes an Intruder alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 02 Guard Access Alarm This output type activates when a zone programmed as Guard Access causes an Intruder alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 03 Entry Alarm This output type activates when a zone programmed as Entry Exit 1 or 2 causes an Intruder alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 04 Confirmed Alarm If an area is already in alarm this output type activates when a different zone not on the entry route is activated in the selected area a
141. ctory default settings cannot be reloaded by pressing the factory default button during power up note f the NVM is locked and the Engineer User code has been lost or forgotten the PCB will have to be replaced 10 Engineer Only Access to the Engineers Programming menus can be obtained by just entering the Engineer User code User Engineer Access to the Engineers Programming mode can only be obtained if a User with the Engineer Access attribute has authorised engineer access see page 111 for details 11 Chime Audible Zones programmed with the Chime 2 or 3 attribute will only generate a Chime tone Chime Visible Default Zones programmed with the Chime 2 or 3 attribute will generate a Chime tone The keypad will also display the number of the zone that was activated 12 Omit Tampers No A user cannot omit Tamper faults on a zone Omit Tampers Yes A user can omit Tamper faults on a zone 13 Offline Printing If a printer is plugged onto the control panel nothing will be printed unless a printout is requested see page 121 for details Online Printing If a printer is plugged onto the control panel anything that is logged in the event log is also printed at the same time 14 Hide Act Fault If a zone with the Activity attribute is not activated during the Activity Delay time window the area that the zone is assigned to can still be armed However this fault will be indicate
142. d LOW BAT Alarm The control panel has registered a low battery condition LOW V Alarm Expander has detected that s its supply voltage is low MANUAL TEST CALL A Manual test call has been initiated MIC TESTED Microphone on the Audio Verification Module has been tested Monitored Alarm A zone programmed as key tube has caused an alarm No RF Signal The Wireless receiver has detected a signal loss from zone PA From Remote FOB A PA has been generated from a Remote Fob Panel Line Fault The control panel line fault input has been activated PART Armed Area has been Part Armed PART 1 Armed Part Arm 1 has been selected PART 2 Armed Part Arm 2 has been selected PART 3 Armed Part Arm 3 has been selected POWERED UP System Power Up without doing a factory restart POWER O P FAULT The system has generated a Power Output Fault see Table Power ID Fault on Page 98 POWER UNIT FAILURE The system has generated a rate of voltage failure PROG END The Engineer has logged out of the Programming menu PROG START An Engineer code has been entered PSUac Alarm An expander input programmed as PSU Monitor control panel has detected an AC Mains failure PSUbat Alarm An expander input programmed as PSU Monitor control panel has detected a Battery fault PSUvol Alarm An expander input programmed a
143. d now be on if status LED 3 is dim this indicates a low GSM signal level If the signal level is low try moving the antenna to improve the reception INS176 10 39 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual AV Module Before connecting the AV Module isolate ALL power from the control panel AC mains and battery do not continue if there is still power present on the control panel To install the AV Module onto the control panel e Connect one end of the patch lead on to the Expansion Port of the AV Module e Connect one other end of the patch lead on to the Expansion Port of the control panel Programming the AV Module e Program the Expansion Port for AV Module operation see page 95 for details e Refer to the AV Module installation guide for full programming details ComiP Module The ComIP module allows the Premier Elite control panels to be connected to either a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN The internet is considered as a WAN Once the control panel is connected to a network the following features can be achieved e Upload Download via Wintex UDL e Signal alarms to an Alarm Receiving Centre e High security polling by Alarm Receiving Centre Typical LAN configuration Premier Control Panel PC Module Ss DDD De E BB e d H SOS DS Network Hub Switch Wintex Upload Download L
144. d to the user when they try to arm the area View Act Fault If a zone with the Activity attribute is not activated during the Activity Delay time window the area that the zone is assigned to cannot be armed This situation can only be overcome by activating the zone 15 Hide Exit Errors If a user tries to arm an area and there are zones activated the exit mode will continue giving a visual and audible indication that there is a problem View Exit Error If a user tries to arm an area and there are zones activated the exit mode is suspended until all of the zones are secure 16 Enable Code Tampers 24 invalid key presses on a keypad will cause a Code Tamper condition see option 17 No Code Tampers A Code Tamper condition will never occur when the keys on a keypad are pressed more than 24 times 17 Code Tamper Alarm A Code Tamper condition will cause a Tamper alarm in the areas that the keypad is assigned to Code Tamper Lockout A Code Tamper condition will cause the keypad to lockout for the duration of the keypad lockout timer see page 63 Notre Option 16 above must be set to enable code tampers in order for this option to work 18 Areas A H amp I P The first 8 areas will be displayed as letters A through to H and the last 8 areas will be displayed as letters through to P Areas 1 8 I P The first 8 areas will be displayed as numbers 1 through to 8 and the last 8 areas will be displ
145. default Engineer code a and the alarm tone will stop e To access the Engineer Programming Menu enter the default Engineer code a e The Confirm Devices menu will appear check and make sure all installed Keypads and Expanders are showing press Yes and Yes again to confirm e V2 10 gt If a Ricochet enabled expander is indentified the system will enter the Learn function for devices this new dedicated menu can be accessed at any point from the top level menus by pressing the key See page 50 amp 126 for details e Program the system as described in section 5 Programming the Control Panel e Perform a zone test as described on page 116 Remember that some powered detectors e g PIR s and combined technology detectors take up to 180 seconds to warm up and become operational e Test the internal sounder external sounder and strobe as described on page 116 e Replace the lid and secure with the lid screw supplied e Press followed by YES to leave the programming menu the system will return to normal e The display will be showing that there is a Mains Power Off condition Switch on the AC mains supply to the control panel e The normal banner message if programmed will now be displayed Installation is now complete and the system is ready for use Trouble Shooting Control Panel No Power to unit mains only e Check the mains block fuse and replace if blown e Check for loose wires at the mains
146. e 89 amp 81 for details Dialling Attempts This is the number of times the communicator will try to dial the Alarm Receiving Centre or Pager telephone number Nore The number of dialling attempts is limited to 9 If this value is set to 0 the communicator will never dial out The following option is only displayed if the Fast Format protocol is selected Reporting on This option defines which channels report to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre Restoring on This option defines which channels report a restore to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre Open Close on This option defines which channels report Open Close to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre The following option is only displayed if Contact ID or SIA Level II protocols are selected Reporting Areas This option defines which areas report events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre The following option is only displayed if Contact ID SIA Level II or EasyCom Pager protocols are selected Reports This option defines which events report to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using Contact ID or SIA Level II P Priority Alarm and Cancel Events The system will report Priority alarm and cancel events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre A Normal Alarm and Cancel Events The system will report alarm and cancel events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre O Open and Close Events The system will report open and close events to the sel
147. e Fault Silence Sounders Normally used to silence the Internal sounders following an Intruder alarm and would be used in conjunction with Audio Verification units apply OV to silence Global Omit Key Normally wired to a key switch When the key switch is activated all zones with the Omit attribute assigned to the same area as the expander will be omitted OV removed for omit Local Omit Key Normally wired to a key switch When the key switch is activated all zones with the Omit attribute wired to the expander will be omitted OV removed for omit PSU Monitor Normally used to monitor a Power Supply for faults see page 35 for wiring details Defer Auto Arming Normally used to defer the automatic arming of an area apply OV to defer Expander Speaker Volume This option controls the volume level of advisory tones from loudspeakers connected to the expanders Advisory tones consist of Entry Exit and Warning type tones 1 minimum 8 maximum Note Alarm tones are always full volume Expander Sounder Options The speaker output on the expander can be programmed so that certain types of tones are not generated When deselected Fire Alarms Fault Service Entry Exit and Chime tones will not be heard Select tones by pressing keys 1 to 8 a letter on the display means the tone is selected a Dot on the display means the tone is not selected F_ Fire Tones On Fire alarm tones wil
148. e SMG Port This is a descriptive name for the IP Module or SMG Port and might be used for authentication purposes Chiron Iris GPRS Data Access Pnt Name This is the GPRS Access point Name provided by Chiron User Name This is the APN User Name provided by Chiron Password This is the APN password provided by Chiron SMS Centres SMS Centre Pri This is the first SMS centre telephone number that is used by for sending SMS to mobile phones Default 07785499993 SMS Centre Sec This is the second SMS centre telephone number that is used by for sending SMS to mobile phones Default 07860980480 Modem Modem Setup Sig If a standard PC modem is connected to Com1 or Com2 it may require a configuration string to make it work properly please refer to instruction manual of modem being used for details of required AT commands Note The Setup string is programmed the same way that TEXT would be programmed and has a maximum length of 16 characters The setup string does NOT require AT to be entered at the beginning as this is done automatically Modem Speed This option allows the speed of a standard PC modem connected to Com1 or Com2 to be adjusted Radio Pad Info Pad Serial No This screen displays the Serial number of the Radio Pad that is connected Pad NUA This screen displays the NUA number of the Radio Pad that is connected Last Call From This screen displays the NUA number of the last Radio Pad that
149. e display means the option is selected a Dot on the display means the option is not selected The following UDL options are available A DL Attended The system will not allow the remote downloading computer access without user authorisation first M Man Call Back The system will not use the automatic call back feature The user must instruct the panel to call back the remote downloading computer The Auto Call Back feature operates as follows e The remote downloading computer calls the control panel and establishes a connection e The UDL password is verified and the remote downloading computer instructs the panel to call it back using one of the 3 call back numbers e The panel hangs up and dials the requested number and re establishes the connection with the remote downloading computer D Call Defeat The modem will answer incoming calls as follows e The modem must detect one or more rings and the number of rings must NOT exceed the value set up in Rings Required e When the ringing stops the panel will start a 30 second delay timer e If the modem detects ringing before the timer expires it will answer the call immediately L Armed DL Limited The panel will not allow download access when the system is armed also see below A Any Area Armed The panel will not allow download access when any areas are armed K Online RKP Off The control panel cannot be accessed using the On line keypad
150. e enter the correct code WARNING When an Engineers code is entered to gain access to the Programming menu by default ALL zones and tampers are disabled A menu option can then be selected by pressing one of the keys shown or by using the key to search Once selected press YES to access that option To leave the selected menu option and return to the main programming menu press Qese To exit from the Main Programming menu but still remain Logged onto the system zones and tampers still disabled press and the display will show Alarm Engineer Working On Site To log the Engineer off the system press followed by YES and the system will revert to its normal condition The table below shows the menu options available Key Menu Option Page D Zone Setup 48 Area Programming 55 Global Options 63 Keypad Setup 73 ED Expander Setup 75 System Outputs 77 UDL Digi Options 84 Setup Users 108 Engineer Utils 113 Alter Part Arms 124 Ricochet Learn Menu 50 amp 126 The Arming Menu The User Menu Log Off Engineer 47 Exit programming mode 47 5 Programming the Control Panel VES to Selecti Eespad Setur ES ta Selecti Pander Setur o Selecti em Outputs da bo Se nSineer 5 La Selecti Hem ones Do You want ta EXIT amp LOG IO AO ant Beni Menu E ay Vank lzer eru em Endinesr HE On Site rere ER Kette keete et H
151. e mapped to any zone number on the system however when mapped to a zone number that already exists i e Zone 5 panel that zone can no longer be used on the 12 W Zones 5 8 should be used for keypad zone mapping If a zone is mapped to a zone number not already on the system i e Zone 25 expander 3 and expander 3 is then added that zone on the expander Zone 25 cannot be used If you wish to use the zone on the expander the keypad zone must be remapped to a different number If a zone is remapped to a different number the new zone number must be treated as a new zone on the system and therefore needs to be programmed accordingly the zone programming will NOT automatically follow the mapping Keypad Options These 8 options control various keypad functions Select options by pressing keys 1 to 8 a letter on the display means the option is selected a Dot on the display means the option is not selected P PA Enabled Pressing keys 1 amp 3 together will cause a PA alarm F Fire Enabled Pressing keys 4 amp 6 together will cause a Fire alarm M Medical Enabled Pressing keys 7 amp 9 together will cause a Medical alarm T Tamper Enabled Removing the keypad cover will cause a Tamper alarm A PA is Audible A keypad PA 1 amp 3 will cause an audible PA alarm D PA is Delayed When the keypad PA buttons 1 amp 3 are pressed the Keypad PA Delay timer starts if a User code is entered before the
152. e network cable and connect the harness lead supplied 3 Fit the 4 self adhesive feet supplied to the four mounting holes Remove the self adhesive backing paper and secure to the base of the control panel 4 Connect the 5 way end of the harness to the 5 way connector on the module 5 Connect the other end onto a control panel communication port 6 Connect the network cable to the RJ45 connection on the module The network status LED s indicate the following Right LED Meaning Off No Link Solid Amber 100BASE T Half Duplex Link Blinking Amber 400BASE T Half Duplex Activity Solid Green 100BASE T Full Duplex Link Blinking Green 400BASE T Full Duplex Activity Solid Amber Off 10BASE T Half Duplex Link inking Amber Off 10BASE T Half Duplex Activity Solid Green Off 10BASE T Full Duplex Link Blinking Green Off 10BASE T Full Duplex Activity 40 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation Commissioning The control panel must be programmed correctly in order for the module to function as expected The following section covers the items that need to be configured on the control panel in order to make the Com P module operate correctly The actual details on how to program the following items can be found in the relevant control panel installation manual ComiP Address Each TCP IP node on a network host has a unique IP address
153. e selected User code Press to exit from Setup Users Adding SmartKey Introduction Premier Elite SmartKey are now learnt and all functionality managed through the Setup Users Menu Ricochet V2 and Premier Elite Series V2 firmware upgrades add additional capabilities to the management of Premier Elite SmartKey In multiple expander systems it is now possible to choose which zones and therefore expander the Premier Elite SmartKey will use for its routeing LED and Aux functions can also be changed within the Setup Users menu All users on the system can have a Premier Elite SmartKey a TAG and a code or any combination of them This section only deals with Premier Elite SmartKey learning and routeing all other user programmable options can be found in INS176 8 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual or later NOTE Great care should be taken when using large numbers of Premier Elite SmartKey only one Premier Elite SmartKey per expander can be used by the system at any one time and on Multiple expanders systems or large sites functionality should be checked in all areas of the site where the device may be used Premier Elite SmartKey Routing Premier Elite SmartKey should only be learned to the system AFTER all devices have been learned and placed in their final location Whilst it is possible to learn at any point during the programming of the system learning and testing the functiona
154. ected Alarm Receiving Centre B Omit and Reinstate Events The system will report omit and reinstate events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre M Maintenance Alarm Events The system will report maintenance alarm events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre T Tamper Alarm Events The system will report tamper alarm events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre C Test Call Events The system will report test call events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre R Restore Events The system will report restore events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre The following option is only displayed if Fast Format Contact ID or SIA Level II protocols are selected Config This option defines which secondary options are enabled A Area Account Events are reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre using the area account numbers see page 89 for details S SIA Level UCP Events are reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre using SIA Level or or to an SMS Messaging Server using UCP R Enable Radio Pad The system will use the Paknet radio pad to report events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre G Enable GSM Module The system will use the GSM Module to report events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre A AV Module The AV Module will dial the Alarm Receiving Centre F Use GSM First The GSM module is the primary path when this is enabled l Connect Via IP The system will use the IP Module t
155. ected on the control panel and deactivates when mains is detected 02 Aux Fuse Blown This output type activates when the Auxiliary fuse F1 fails and deactivates when the system is reset 03 Bell Tamper This output type activates when the control panel Bell tamper or an expander input programmed as Bell tamper is activated causing a Tamper alarm on the system and deactivates when the Tamper alarm is reset 04 Auxiliary Tamper This output type activates when the control panel Aux tamper or an expander input programmed as Auxiliary tamper is activated causing a Tamper alarm on the system and deactivates when the Tamper alarm is reset 05 Panel Lid Tamper This output type activates whenever the panel cover is removed causing a Tamper alarm on the system and deactivates when the Tamper alarm is reset 06 Engineer Workin This output type activates whenever an Engineer code is entered to access the programming menu and deactivates when the engineer logs off 07 Confirm Devices This output type activates when the control panel requires devices to be confirmed and deactivates when the devices are confirmed see page 118 for details 08 Service Required This output type activates when the Service Interval timer expires and deactivates when an Engineer code is entered see page 63 for details 09 Bell Fuse Blown This output type activates when the control panel bell fuse F4 fails and deactivates
156. ed Fire Alarms Fault Service Entry Exit and Chime tones will not be heard Select tones by pressing keys 1 to 8 a letter on the display means the tone is selected a Dot on the display means the tone is not selected F Fire Tones On Fire alarm tones will be generated by the control panel sounder speaker A Alarm Tones On Intruder alarm Tamper alarm and PA alarm tones will be generated by the control panel sounder speaker F Fault Tones On Fault tones will be generated by the control panel sounder speaker S Service Tone On Service and Warning tones will be generated by the control panel sounder speaker E Entry Tones On Entry tones will be generated by the control panel sounder speaker X Exit Tones On Exit tones will be generated by the control panel sounder speaker C Chime Tones On Chime 1 2 and 3 tones will be generated by the control panel sounder speaker INS176 10 71 Global Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual PC Output Text pgti ions Gut GL Global OFLions System Timers Global OFtions PC Output Test Use keys 1 8 to select a text option or use the SCROLL key to search ie 4 PC Output4 Text PC Duteut 4 Text Press NO to editthe text Edit Text gt ABC Use keys 0 9 to program text the same way thata mobile phone works Central Heating Edit Text AE Press NO followed b
157. ed as Key Tube has caused an alarm USER User has entered their code User Ack A user has acknowledged a fault to set system USER CODE CHANGED A User code has been altered USER ADDED A User code has been added USER DELETED A User code has been deleted User Reset A reset has been performed using a User code WALK Test Start The Walk Test mode has been initiated Zone Alarm Zone has been activated Zone Tamper Zone has caused a Tamper alarm Zone Restore Zone has restored to its normal condition Zone Omitted Zone has been omitted Zone Un Omit Zone has been reinstated Zone Test Start Zone has been put on test Zone Test End Zone has been removed from test Zone Fault Zone has generated a Fault Condition Zone Masked Zone has been Masked INS176 10 115 Engineer Utilities Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Do Bell Test Engineer Obits Endineer Utils View Event Lod EnJineer Utils Do Bell Test Bei T Press OMIT to invoke the Engineers Hold Off mode of a Texecom Bellbox Bet feet Press YES to test ALL channels or use keys 0 8 to select individual channels e g 3 Channel 3 Push YES to test Didi etek Press YES again to clear ALL channels or use keys 0 8 to clear individual channels e g 3 Channel 3 Push YES to test Didi p seed This option allows the Bell Speaker and various control panel outp
158. ees a rol pe O 5 6 6 H o EE A Ye L W BCC MN r I A f a a ke o ha a 4 1 A un F D Dec o o amp Antenna connection Tamper switch Com1 data connection to Premier control panel O Engineer keypad connector only used to power the Premier Elite ComGSM when using APNProgrammer Option switches see table below 6 Status LED s see table below Audio connector for future use Heartbeat LED 9 SIM card socket Option Switches The option switches O function as follows Function Off On Tamper GSM will not communicate GSM will communicate Comms if the unit is in tamper regardless of the tamper GPRS Accepts connections on port server Normal GSM operation 10001 and allows reporting over GPRS GSM IP IP mode 19200 baud V1 65 and earlier only GSM mode 9600 baud V1 65 and earlier only N A For future use leave in OFF position Status LEDs The three status LED s indicate the following Off On Flashing GSM NOT Ready GSM Ready GSM Communicating Panel NOT Ready Panel Ready Panel Communicating No Signal less than Good be
159. elector DEDE E me Standby Current 150mA 1x7Ah lt 24Hrs 0 3A INS176 10 129 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Specifications Output Voltage Range 13 0V to 13 9V Output 5 88 168 3 Amp Relay Maximum Ripple Voltage 0 5V pk pk Siren Outputs Battery type sealed lead acid up to 18Ah Bell Trigger 1A switched to OV Maximum recharge time 72h Strobe Trigger 1A switched to OV Battery Low Voltage Signal 9 5V Speaker Output Minimum load 8Q Power Output Fault signal 10 5V with mains present Deep Discharge protection 8 1V Environmental All Models Over voltage protection trigger 16V Fuses Electronic PTC F3 1600 mA Battery F4 250mA Speaker F5 900mA Network 1 F6 900mA Bell Strobe F7 900mA Network 2 F8 900mA Network 3 F9 900mA Network 4 F10 900mA Network 5 F11 900mA Network 6 F12 900mA Network 7 F13 900mA Network 8 F14 900mA Auxiliary 12V Housing 1mm Mild Steel 315mm x 415mm x 100mm Up tp one 18Ah battery Dimensions W x H x D Battery Compartment Packed Weight 4 5 Kg Approx General All Models Operating Temperature 10 C to 40 C Storage Temperature 20 C o 60 C Maximum Humidity 95 non condensing EMC Environment Residential Commercial Light Industrial Industrial Inhibit Functions For Alarms and Tamper is controlled by the Swinger shutdown counter
160. ell fuse on the control panel has blown The Auxiliary fuse on the control panel has blown There is a fault with the lid tamper of Keypad X X Keypad X X has been lost off of the system There is a fault with the lid tamper of Expander X X Expander X X has been lost off of the system The voltage at expander X X is very low The expander s Auxiliary input that is programmed as bell tamper is in fault The expander s Auxiliary input that is programmed as aux tamper is in fault The service timer has expired indicating that the system requires a service the system can normally still be used The user code is locked out normally during entry The system must be disarmed using a Prox TAG To many invalid code attempts have caused the keypad to lock out The keypad will remain like this for 5 minutes The keypad has been disabled to prevent unauthorised access The display will automatically clear when it is re enabled Areas are being armed using one of the control timers enter a valid User code to defer the arming for 30 minutes 44 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Programming Introduction All engineers should read this section carefully so as to familiarise themselves with the programming of the control panel To access the Programming menu enter the factory default Engineer code a Gad If a mistake is made whilst entering the Engineer code simply r
161. er Elite Series Installation Manual 1 System Overview System Architecture 8 to 24 zones Premier 24 4 keypads Premier 24 1 Output Module Premier 24 2 Expanders Premier 24 8 to 48 Zones Premier 48 4 Keypads Premier 48 2 Output Modules Premier 48 4 Expanders Premier 48 8 to 88 Zones Premier 88 8 Keypads Premier 88 4 Output Modules Premier 88 8 Expanders Premier 88 8 to 168 Zones Premier 168 16 Keypads Premier 168 8 Output Modules Premier 168 16 Expanders Premier 168 0 to 640 Zones Premier 640 64 Keypads Premier 640 32 Output Modules P remier 640 64 Expanders P remier 640 16 Programmable 100mA Outputs 8 Zone Inputs 2 Zone 1Programmable 2 Zone 1Programmable 8 Zone Inputs Inputs 100 mA Output Inputs 100 mA Output WITLI l 8 Programmable a 100mA Outputs Premier Speaker 8 Pi bl 100MA Outpuls 24 48 88 168 640 Output Speaker Output H Auxiliary Input 4 Wire Data Network 1 E Le Premier LCDACDP Premier LCDLACDLP Premier OP16 Premier 8XP 5 Programmable Outputs 4 x500mA amp 1 Relay Premier 88 168 amp 640 only Additional Wire as Network 1 if 4 Wire Data Network PC and Modem for R emote Upload Download Bell Strobe Outputs Plug on Digimodem Bell Tamper Input gt Com300 Com2400 S a GSM Module We bwayOne Emizon Auxiliary Ta mper Input or Chiron Iris PC and PC Com for Local U ploa d Download Alarm Receiving Centre No Onboard Zo
162. er Elite Series Installation Manual Global Options Holiday Dates Global Ortions Halidas Dates Use the SCROLL key to selecta Holiday Date Hol igaya gt gt Use keys 0 9 to enter the new date DD MM YY e g 030501 3rd May 2001 Enter new date gt 8385 81 The system has 8 programmable holiday dates The holiday dates are pre defined dates on which the Control Timers will not operate Example Control Timer 1 is programmed to operate between the hours of 8pm and 8am on Monday through to Friday for the purpose of arming the control panel Because Bank Holidays normally fall on Mondays the panel would disarm itself leaving the premises unprotected e Christmas day 2001 falls on a Tuesday e Under normal conditions the Control Timer will operate on a Tuesday e The 25 12 01 is programmed as a Holiday Date e The Control Timer does not operate on Tuesday 25 December 2001 and the premises remains protected at all times Speaker Tones zt det fons Global OFtions System Timers Global OFtions Sreaker Tones Press No to edit the sounder option Use keys 1 8 to select deselect the sounder option or use the SCROLL key to search Press No to select deselect the sounder option Entra Tones F eee fi IE The speaker output on the control panel can be programmed so that certain types of tones are not generated When deselect
163. er code e H Anti code Reset is enabled option 14 the assigned areas can also be reset using the Anti code Areas not assigned to Tamper Eng Reset can be reset with any User code that is valid for those areas 13 Anti code Reset Each area can be programmed for Anti code Reset following an Intruder or Tamper alarm Areas assigned to Anti code Reset will respond as follows e The assigned areas can be reset using the Anti code as well as an Engineer code Areas not assigned to Anti code Reset can only be reset using an Engineer code or User code Note Areas can only be assigned to Anti code Reset if they are also assigned to Alarms Eng Reset 14 ATS Path Faults Areas assigned to ATS Path Faults ATS Alarm Transmission System will respond as follows when an ATS fault occurs e All keypads will display ATS Path Fault e All keypads and speakers assigned to the same area as the ATS Path Fault will generate a Service tone every 30 Seconds until the fault is acknowledged by the User entering a valid code for that area e An assigned area can be armed as long as Arm With No ATS is also assigned to that area see option 16 However a warning will be given to indicate the problem Areas not assigned to ATS Path Faults will never be affected by an ATS fault 15 Arm With No ATS Areas assigned to Arm With No ATS ATS Alarm Transmission System can be ar
164. er of times to select a character on the same key press CG to move the cursor along 72 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Keypad Setup 5 4 Keypad Setup EE Use keys 1 8 to selecta keypad and press 0 to toggle between networks e g 0 3 Network 2 Keypad 3 a to the leftof the device number indicates thatthe device is fitted PP Use keys 1 8 to selectanarea e g 2 B Use the Press NO area key to toggle between areas A to H and Ito P to edit the see below for 640 keypad areas REP 2 3 Areas REF 2 A Areas b Fikk i gt ABa i Press NO Enter a zone number Enter a zone to map the or press YES number keypad zones to move to zone B peo Prada Bi aoe Zer rs Press No Use keys 1 8 to select Press No to to editthe a keypad option or use the select deselect keypad options SCROLL key to search the keypad option REP 2 3 Options PA Disabled k ok k Took ok ok ok The okok T kk k BA AA OU ana EE Press NO Use the SCROLL key to editthe to adjust the volume level volume level up amp down or enter a value REPWE A Volume FkbwZ 3 Loles O ka SE ie eve Level 4 Level gt 4 Use keys 1 8 to select Press Noto Press No Ves to editthe select deselect the sounder option a sounder option or use the SCROLL key to search sounder options REP 2 3 Sounds Fire Tones Ent Ti Entra Tones EAF SEXE w Mods ERC
165. er or use the SCROLL key to search SI Output 3 House A Unit ed Howse 4718 Duteut 3 x 10 Du PF Unit Gi House teut 3 F Unitztd 718 Outrut 3 Yes Press NO to Use the key pad to program edit the text the same way thata expander text mobile phone works In Reception Edit Text ABC Edit Text H INS176 10 TI System Outputs Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Available Outputs Various sets of programmable outputs can be found on the control panel keypads expanders and output modules Panel Outputs Panel outputs 1 5 are located on the top right hand corner of the control panel and can be programmed to any of the output types listed see page 34 for wiring details Digi Outputs Digi outputs 1 8 are located on the left hand side of the control panel and can be programmed to any of the output types listed see page 34 for wiring details Digi Channels Digi channels 1 8 are for the Com300 and Com2400 plug on communicators and can be programmed to any of the output types listed RedCARE Relay Pins RedCARE or Relay Pins 1 8 are for a plug on RedCARE or RM8 Relay module and can be programmed to any of the output types listed Keypad Outputs Keypad outputs are for the outputs on the remote keypads see page 22 for details and can be programmed to any of the output types listed Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 34 Ex
166. er will generate tones for i e if the expander is assigned to areas A and C the speaker will only operate when areas A or C are in alarm entry exit etc e Which areas will cause a Tamper alarm when the expander cover is removed Expander Location Text Each expander can be assigned up to 16 characters of text This text can be used to describe where the expander is located within the building Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones Select characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate number of times to select a character on the same key press the O key to move the cursor along Expander Auxiliary Input Each expander has an input that can be programmed for one of the following options If not being used the input must be programmed as Not Used Default Not Used Not Used Never monitored by the system Auxiliary Tamper Normally used for monitoring the box tamper of auxiliary devices such as power supplies etc remove OV for Tamper alarm Bell Tamper Normally used for monitoring Bell Tamper returns remove OV for Tamper alarm Remote Reset Normally used to reset the system area following an Intruder alarm the area must also be programmed for Anti code reset see page 59 for details apply OV to reset Line Fault ve Normally used to indicate a telephone line fault remove OV for Line Fault Line Fault ve Normally used to indicate a telephone line fault apply OV for Lin
167. ere eer a oe Press NO to edit the reports options y Config Yes Back to the start 86 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL amp Digi Options From previous page if Contact ID SIA Level Il EasyCom Pager or S MS Messaging protocols are selected Press NO to edit the reportareas Use keys 1 8 to select the Report areas e g 1 areaA for 640 see below Report Areas 1 Press NO to edit the reports options Priorita Alm Use the SCROLL key to select the required Reports option Press NO to change the reports option onn Alarm Press NO to edit the reports options Use Area Acc Use the SCROLL key to select the required Reports option Press NO to change the reports option Back to the start Rerort Areas 1 1 ABCDEFGHIJELMHOP Rerort Areas 1 1 ABCDEFGH JKLMHOF Gums Car Use the Chime amp Part keys to scroll between Use the Area key to select either A H or IP areas Use the numeric buttons 1 8 to toggle the required areas on or off i 1 1 1 1 1 LI i LI Area Groups 1 2 3 8 4 1 LI 1 LI 1 I i Li 1 LI 1 INS176 10 87 UDL amp Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual
168. ers Using the amp key at this point allows you to view the group of zones and therefore the expander that the S martKey will use i Setur Users UserBaz Use the key to select the group ofZones and Expander you want to use liseragz Ricochet liserGG2 Route Eu E Free Zones O69 046 D lserGGZ Route By l Lseragz E la Zones 689 848 Learning GO UserBaz Ricochet Fob LED fux 1 Oe to toggle LED on or of G to toggle Aux on or off l Y 4 EE E ec tn S Ria 112 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Engineer Utilities View Event Log Endinger TTS Engineer Utils View Event Lod 1 Evernt 2 Alarm S Mandatory Lod FER a3 idas ta Code l David A A Code 61 David A A Use keys 1 2 or 3 to selectthe System Alarm or Madatory log i e 1 System Log Use the SCROLL key to move up and down through the log DOWN moves to the previous event backwards in time and UP moves forwards again Or use one ofthe available hotkeys Press CHIME to find any preceding events relating to the displayed event i e User codes being entered Press AREA to toggle the display between the Area information and the time date Press PART to display any programmed zone text etc 5 9 Engineer Utilities The control panel has three Eve
169. es when Custom Output 2 Stage B deactivates 27 Custom2 Stage AB This output type operates when Custom Output 2 Stage A or B activates and deactivates when Custom Output 2 Stage A deactivates 28 Radio Pad Failed This output type activates when the radio pad fails to communicate with the Alarm Receiving Centre and deactivates when the radio pad successfully communicates 29 Radio Successful This output type activates when the radio pad successfully communicates with the Alarm Receiving Centre and deactivates when the radio pad fails to successfully communicate 30 No Radio Signal This output type activates when the Radio Pads forward signal is lost and deactivates when the signal is regained 31 Radio Pad Lost This output type activates when the Radio Pad stops communicating with its base station or the control panel and deactivates when communication starts again 32 Custom3 Stage A This output type operates when Custom Output 3 Stage A activates and deactivates when Custom Output 3 Stage A deactivates 33 Custom3 Stage B This output type operates when Custom Output 3 Stage B activates and deactivates when Custom Output 3 Stage B deactivates 34 Custom3 Stage AB This output type operates when Custom Output 3 Stage A or B activates and deactivates when Custom Output 3 Stage A deactivates 35 Custom4 Stage A This output type operates when Custom Ou
170. ever any type of communication fault occurs i e No Signal Com Port Fault line fault etc and deactivates when communication starts again 45 Radio Jammin This output type activates whenever the wireless radio receiver detects a jamming signal and deactivates when the jamming signal is removed 46 Radio RX Tamper This output type activates when the wireless radio receiver lid is removed causing a Tamper alarm on the system and deactivates when the Tamper alarm is reset 47 Detector Test This output type is activated via Wintex to initiate a diagnostics check on an PD6662 2004 EN 50131 1 Grade 3 detector and deactivates after 10 seconds 48 ATS Remote Test This output type conforms to the BSIA Form 175 Specification When a Line Fault is not present it can be activated remotely by Wintex or by using the Test Call Timer or Start Test Call option on the control panel to initiate a test on ATE equipment that have an ATS test input NOTE Only the RedCare Line Fault and Control panel Line Fault inputs can be used with the output type 49 No ATS Available This output type activates when no Alarm Transmission paths are available and deactivates when the fault is cleared 50 CIE Fault This output type activates when a fault occurs on the CIE and deactivates when the fault is cleared 51 PSU Fuse Blown This output type activates when the Auxiliary input type PSU Monitor detects a 12V failure and dea
171. g Power to the Control Panel Once steps 1 to 6 are completed power can be applied to the control panel When applying power for the first time the factory default settings must be loaded see page 42 for details Power should always be connected in the following order e Connect the red battery lead to the positive terminal of the battery and then connect the black battery lead to the negative terminal Note The panel will only become live when the AC Mains is connected or the Battery Kick start button is pressed e Connect the AC mains For a complete list of factory default settings see the Quick Reference Guide supplied with your panel 8 Programming the Control Panel Please refer to section 5 for instruction on programming the control panel 9 Testing the System Test the system thoroughly to ensure that all features and functions operate as required see page 113 for details 3 Installation Control Panel Mounting Mount the control panel on a flat plumb wall using at least three screws of appropriate size Note It is essential to ensure that none of the fixing slots or cable entries are accessible after fixing Mains cabling must be secured e g with a cable tie to one of the anchor points provided Wiring the Control Panel WARNING ELECTRICITY CAN KILL BEFORE connecting the control panel ALWAYS disconnect the supply at the consumer unit If in ANY doubt consult a qualified electrician
172. gineer Utilities Premier Elite Series Installation Manual View iD Data YES to Selecti Engineer Utils Engineer Utils View Event Lod Press 0 to toggle between iD Loop 1 and 2 The status of the zones will be display ed 66081 116681180111 EN Press Area to toggle between Normal loop scan Quick loop scan and Biscuit Mapping gt Press 0 to toggle between iD Loop 1 and 2 Use Scroll keys to select the requirediD biscuit Press No to edit the zone mapping and wiring options Use keys 0 9 to enter the zone number Press Omit to toggle between Normally Open and Normally Closed wiring Normally Open iD Loop 1 61 Marred Zone ala Viewing the iD Data This option allows the 60 XD expander the iD biscuit data to be viewed to diagnostic purposes There are two way of viewing the data from the expander Normal Scan Mode This is the normal operation mode of the expander and the data being displayed is the average result of 4 successive scans of the iD loop Quick Scan Mode In this mode the data being displayed is the result of each scan of the iD loop This mode is useful for identifying problems with biscuits due to interference high resistance connections etc iD is a registered trade mark of Chloride Safety System Limited Configure Radio YES to Selecti Engineer Utils Engineer Utils View Event Lod Engineer Utils Configure Radio Bl 10265466 OF
173. h zone is fully programmable see page 48 for details 9 External Sounder Connections These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit see page 33 for details 10 Auxiliary Fault Connections These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an auxiliary device see page 33 for details 11 Loudspeaker Connections These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 16Q or two 8Q loudspeakers see page 33 for details 12 Panel Outputs Outputs 1 8 2 are 500mA ve applied outputs 3 8 4 are 500mA ve applied and output 5 is a clean contact relay see page 34 for wiring details These outputs are all fully programmable see page 77 for details Note Panel outputs 3 4 and 5 are only available on the 88 and 168 13 Plug on Communicator Connections This socket provides connection for the plug on communicator see page 36 for details 14 Box Tamper Connection The box tamper micro switch is connected here The micro switch provides tamper protection for the main control panel in case of unauthorised access To disable the box tamper remove the micro switch lead and fit a jumper link across the two pins 15 Plug on RedCARE Dualcom Connections These pins provide connections for a plug on RedCARE Dualcom Digicom or RM8 Relay module Each output is fully programmable see page 78 for details Nore When a device is plugged on to these pins not all outputs may be available ple
174. hanged This code can be 4 5 or 6 digits in length The system will allow a mixture of different length User codes Adjust Volumes Engineer DIIS Endineer Utils View Evert Lod Use the SCROLL key to selecta Panel Keypad or Expander Speaker Enter a value or use the SCROLL key to increase or decrease the value e g 8 Full Volume Keapad 43 Volume Lewel ag This option is used to adjust the volume level of speakers that are connected to the control panel keypads and expanders DA Pressing the CHIME key will cause the speaker that is being programmed to generate the exit tone at the selected volume level Default NVM Data reine DENIS Engineer Ut View Event ils Lod Engineer Utils Default HUM Data PERSI duteute e Use keys 0 9 to select an option or use the SCROLL key to search e g 3 Keypad Outputs es WES Reset ES BEE Press YES to default the option WB asco ISLET a This option allows various parts of the NVM to be defaulted without having to Factory Default the system Location Text Engineer Ubi Ts Endineer Utils View Event Lod Ha Location Text Has Been Setur This option allows the Panel Location text that has been programmed in System Text to be displayed see page 70 for programming details Note The display will automatically clear after 5 seconds 120 INS176 10 Premier El
175. hat have not activated in the last 7 days zone BEL Sanar Front Door Any of the zones on the system can be walk tested to ensure that they operate correctly A walk test can only be performed when the system or area is disarmed nore Once a zone has been activated it will not generate a chime tone again If however the key is pressed a zone will chime every time it is activated The Walk test menu also includes a last activation log that can be recalled when doing a walk test This log shows zones that have NOT been activated over a period of days Pressing the key will firstly show the zones that still need testing pressing the key a second time will display the zones that have not been activated that day to view zones that have not been activated for 3 days type in 003 the maximum number of days that can be recalled is 255 pressing the key a third time will revert back to the standard walk test display View Zone Status Endineer Utils View Zone Status gone Bil Pa Secure Use keys 0 9 to enter the required zone number or use the SCROLL key to search e g 064 Zone 64 To disable the zone Press OMIT To make the zone Chime Press CHIME To view the zone text 1 578 Press AREA a E d Sane bisa This option can be used to view the status of any zone on the system to see whether it is Active Secure Tampered or Shorted The selected zone can also be
176. hen the country code is chosen The following country codes are available and show the associated defaults loaded by the panel Country Defaults Export UK Russia UK South Africa South Africa Netherlands UK Belgium Norway France France Spain UK Hungary UK Italy UK Czech UK UK UK Denmark Denmark Sweden Sweden Norway Norway Poland UK Germany UK Finland Norway Australia Australia Test UK Themes UK Chinn UK Estonia 172 372 UK 68 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Global Options Monitor Hardware Beas DES Global Drtiorm System Timers Press NO to edit the options Use keys 1 8 to select an attribute or use the SCROLL key to search SA SEL Bell Tamrer FA Ost AL Yes Press NO to select deselect the option The control panel monitors many inputs for fault conditions i e the panel lid tamper bell tamper aux fuse etc Each one of these options can be disabled to overcome problems related to the devices being monitored P_ ATS Path Faults The Alarm Transmission System is monitored for faults A AC Power Failure The AC Mains is monitored for faults O Power Outputs Charger The Power outputs and charger are monitored for faults see page 107 for the list of Power Outputs monitored B Bell Tamper The external sounder tamper loop is monitored for faults A_ Aux Tamper The auxiliary tamper loop
177. his HO indicates that the control timer will operate on any programmed Holiday date INS176 10 69 Global Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual System Text Global OFtions System Timers Global OFtions System Text Reset Mes ado Use keys 1 6 to select a text option or use the SCROLL key to search i e 5 Banner Message YES to EDIT Barner Pescado Press YES to editthe text Edit Text gt ABC Use keys 0 9 to program text the same way thata mobile phone works Press NO followed by YES to clear the screen or keep pressing NO to change between upper case lower case numerical and predictive text Edit Text LR ABC Alarms 2081 Edit Text 312 Yes The system has 7 programmable messages 1 Reset Message This 32 character message is displayed whenever the control panel requires an Engineer reset 2 Anti code Msg This 32 character message is displayed whenever the control panel requires a Anti code Reset 3 Service Message This 32 character message is displayed whenever the control panel requires Daytime reset 4 Location Text This 32 character message is displayed whenever the engineer views the location text in Engineer Utils 5 Banner Message This 16 character message is displayed above the time and date whenever the control panel is unarmed or fully armed 6 Part Arm Banner T
178. his 16 character message is displayed above the time and date whenever the control panel is part armed 7 Printer Header This 16 character header will be printed whenever a log printout is taken from the control panel or a Short Message Service SMS text message is sent to a mobile phone Part Arm Text rt Detiene Global OFtions System Timers Global OFtions Stay Arm Tex Evening Arm Text for Staa 1 Use keys 1 3 to selecta stay arm group or use the SCROLL key to search e g 3 Stay Arm 3 Press No to editthe text Edit es Eet Press NO to select clear screen Bedtime Arm Z Edit Text CLE Press YES to clear screen Edit Text AIST Use keys 0 9 to program text the same way thata mobile phone works HiJhtime setting Edit Test Stat Text may be assigned to Part Arm 1 2 or 3 to allow the user to select the correct Part Arm by description instead of number A maximum of 16 characters can be programmed for each of the Part Arms Note The 3 Part Arm messages are global messages and will appear whenever one of the part arms are selected regardless of which area is being part armed Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones Select characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate number of times to select a character on the same key press lt gt to move the cursor along 70 INS176 10 Premi
179. i These groups of Area timers control timing and delay functions for areas A B 24 A D 48 A H 88 and A P 168 amp groups 1 4 Area A P 640 Each timer can be programmed for any value between 000 and 999 5 2 Area Programming Nore The area bell timers in options 5 6 and 8 below are only active when system config option 5 is switched to Area Bell Time Timers listed are for Areas A to B A to D A to H A to P 1 2 3 4 A P depending on the panel being used 1 Exit Delay When the area exit mode is programmed as Timed this timer controls the delay between the user initiating the exit mode for the selected area and the area actually 2 Entry 1 Delay If the area is armed and an Entry Exit 1 zone is activated this timer will start and the entry tone will be heard If the area is not disarmed before this timer expires the 2 Entry Delay timer will start 3 Entry 2 Delay If the area is armed and an Entry Exit 2 zone is activated this timer will start and the entry tone will be heard If the area is not disarmed before this timer expires the 2 Entry Delay timer will start 4 24 Entry Dly When the area Entry Delay 1 or 2 timer expires this timer will start and an Internal alarm will occur If the area is still not disarmed before this timer expires an Intruder alarm will then occur 5 Bell Delay This timer controls the delay between an Intruder alar
180. icochet y Power up Device The bottom line of text shows learn menu pressing the CH Geset key will enter the Delete gt N2 E D 20s the Network the Expander and 2a S Se the device sloton the expander devices menu CDD Learn Device to Use the W KD or Sto Fone 777 He E Pl select different zones It is only mie a possible to select Zones which Ge LD God KD Ze Access the Learn Menu using the Omit Hot key From any top level engineering menu pressing the Comit key will take you to the Ricochet learn menu above Menu Ricochet Learn Menu YES to Selecti YES to Selecti Learn Ricochet IMPORTANT In all cases when entering the Learn menu the next available free Zone will be chosen to learn a device too It will not be possible to learn a device to a Zone that already has a device learned too it The number of expander s on the system will dictate which next free zone is chosen to learn too Auto Zone Type amp Area When learning devices if no editing has taken place of the control panel onboard hardwired zones these will be switched to Not Used after the first Ricochet device is learned to the system the following defaults will be used for Ricochet devices learned to the system 001 008 Not Used 009 Entry Exit 1 010 Guard Access 011 amp above Guard IMPORTANT If any editing of any of the on board control panel zones is carried out BEFORE any Ricochet devices are
181. ill cause an Arm Fail if they are not secure at the end of the exit mode 1 PART 1 OMIT Zones with this attribute will be omitted when Part Arm 1 is selected Zones without this attribute will respond as normal 2 PART 2 OMIT Zones with this attribute will be omitted when Part Arm 2 is selected Zones without this attribute will respond as normal 3 PART 3 OMIT Zones with this attribute will be omitted when Part Arm 3 is selected Zones without this attribute will respond as normal A ACCESS Zones with this attribute will not cause a Fault during the exit mode or an Intruder alarm during the entry mode However if the zone is activated at any other time an Intruder alarm will occur Zones without this attribute will respond as normal E ENTRY EXIT 2 Zones with this attribute will start the Entry Delay 2 timer for the selected area when the area is part armed Note Entry Exit 1 or 2 zones with this attribute will become a Guard zone for the duration of the Abort timer if a zone with the Guard attribute activates and cause an alarm when the area is fully armed Zones without this attribute will respond as normal G GUARD Zones with this attribute will cause an Intruder alarm when the area is part armed this would normally be used on Entry Exit 1 or 2 zone types cS When the area is fully armed activation of a zone with this attribute will cause a
182. ill cause the area Alarm output to activate Note Any Custom zone with this attribute will activate both the internal and external sounders even if they are not enabled above W WARNING REQ If the zone remains Active for the duration of the Warning Delay timer see page 64 a warning tone will occur every 30 seconds for 3 minutes or until a code is entered or is pressed note lf MONITOR 24H is enabled an internal alarm will occur after the Warning Delay Zone Areas 12 24 48 88 168 The 12 amp 24 can be divided into two separate areas of protection the 48 can be divided into four separate areas of protection the 88 can be divided into eight separate areas of protection and the 168 can be divided into sixteen separate areas of protection This allows different parts of a building to be armed and disarmed independently from each other By default all zones are assigned to area A but if required a zone can be assigned to any number of areas Note f a zone is assigned to more than one area it will only be recognised by the system when all areas it is assigned to are armed Zone Areas 640 The 640 can be divided into sixty four separate areas of protection This allows different parts of a building to be armed and disarmed independently from each other By default all zones are assigned to area A but if required a zone can be assigned to any number of areas Note f a zone is assigned to more than one area
183. ing on site this message will clear when the engineer logs off or the system is armed Alarm Engineer Working On Site Mains Power Off There has been an AC Mains failure Tue 66 Mar 2061 There is a fault with the ATS Alarm Transmission System ATS Path Fault Tue 66 Mar 2661 Ho Path Available Tue 86 Mar 2061 Ho Battery Tue 86 Mar 2661 Battery Fault Tue B Mar 2061 Ares Failed Test Tue 86 Mar 2061 Panel Lid Tamper Tue B Mar 2861 Bell Tamrer Tue 86 Mar 2061 Auxiliary Tamper Tue 86 Mar 2061 Bell Fuse Blown Tue B Mar 2061 Aux Fuse Bloun Tue 86 Mar 2061 REF an Tamper Tue B Mar 2061 REP Kim Lost Tue 86 Mar 2061 EsP 28 Tamer Tue 86 Mar 2061 EVP Kim Lost Tue B Mar 2061 EXP xan Lo Volts Tue 86 Mar 2061 ExP Bell Tame Va Tue B Mar 2661 ExP Aux Tame sa Tue 86 Mar 2061 Service Resuired Tue 86 Mar 2061 Sorry Code not allowed use TAG Remote Keypad is now LOCKED out Area Secured Tue 86 Mar 2061 Ting n gt There are no ATS Alarm Transmission System paths available The Standby Battery has not been connected There is a fault with the control panel standby battery or it is not connected Zones that have been placed on test have failed the test There is a fault with the control panel lid tamper There is a fault with the bell tamper on the control panel There is a fault with the auxiliary tamper on the control panel The b
184. ing the system and will be cleared when the engineers code is entered At the end of the soak test all zones that have passed the test will be returned to normal operation Soak Test Areas 640 YES Lo Selecti EnJineer Utils Endineer Utils View Event Lod S Endineer Utils Soak Test Areas Yes Use the Chime amp Chimoy Ce Part keys to scroll between Vv Area Groups 1 2 3 amp 4 Use the Area key to select either A H or FP areas Cares Use the numeric buttons 1 8 to toggle the required areas on or off Soak Test Areasi ABCDERGHS nannan Cea Press YES to default the option When an area is selected for soak test the soak test timer is started Any zones in the selected area with the soak test attribute will be put on soak test for the duration of the soak test timer see page 63 If the area soak test option is subsequently deselected before the end of the test all zones are returned to normal operation When a zone is on soak test it will not cause an alarm when activated However the system will log the event and will notify the user that the zone has failed soak test A test failure will not prevent the user arming the system and will be cleared when the engineers code is entered At the end of the soak test all zones that have passed the test will be returned to normal operation INS176 10 121 En
185. ion is required INS176 10 65 Global Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual 23 User Code Pulse Entering a user code which has an associated user output will cause the output to activate for the duration of the door strike timer User Code Latch Entering a user code which has an associated user output will cause the output to toggle from off to on or from on to off 24 Timed Test Call A test call to the Alarm Receiving Centre will occur every time the Test Call Every timer expires Test Call CT4 A test call to the Alarm Receiving Centre will occur every time Control Timer 4 activates 25 Batt Test Timed A battery test will occur every time the Batt Test Period timer expires Batt Test Disarm A battery test will occur every time the system is disarmed or after the Batt Test Period timer has expired whichever occurs first 26 Bell 1st Alarm The Bell and Strobe outputs will activate after an Intruder alarm 1st Alarm occurs Bell 2nd Alarm The Bell and Strobe outputs will activate after a Confirmed alarm 2nd Alarm occurs 27 SNDR 1st Alarm The internal sounders will sound after an Intruder alarm 1st Alarm occurs SNDR 2nd Alarm The internal sounders will sound after a Confirmed alarm 2nd Alarm occurs 28 Conf Instant Following the arming of the system area if two zones activate causing a Confirmed alarm the signal
186. ions 44 FOB Batt Warn When during arming if a low fob battery event is received the arming will be cancelled and the keypad will generate a warning the user will have to affirm the Arm with faults on the keypad before arming will proceed Both the low battery and the user acknowledgement will be logged No FOB Batt Warn When during arming if a low fob battery event is received the arming will proceed but the low fob battery will be logged in the event log 45 Entry Stray Enables Entry Stray to comply with BS8243 or EN50131 1 This flag is selectable by configuring option 46 No Entry Stray Disables Entry Stray 46 BS Entry Stray A second alarm condition during the alarm notification period will immediately expire the alarm notification timer This will cause a confirmed alarm message to be set to the arc and logged in the event log No BS Entry Stray Second and subsequent alarm conditions during the alarm notification period have no effect on the timer 47 Tamp No Confirm If a device has caused an unconfirmed alarm then a tamper from that same device will not cause a confirmed alarm Tamper Confirm If a device has caused an unconfirmed alarm then a tamper from that same device will cause a confirmed alarm 48 Radio 2 Step Arm When arming using a wireless FOB The arming procedure requires two steps Radio 1 Step Arm When arming using a wireless FOB The arming procedure requires one step 49 R
187. is connected to the Com1 connector on the left hand side of the control panel Default No Module Fitted The following devices are available from the above list 0 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 Note f any of the above devices are connected to the control panel on Com and a PC needs to be connected for uploading downloading the device must be disconnected from Com 1 and the Factory Default button pressed for 3 seconds to allow the PC to talk to the control panel If the PC is not connected to the control panel or is removed the Com port will automatically revert back to normal operation after 1 minute Com2 This option determines what type of device is connected to the Com2 connector on the left hand side of the control panel Default No Module Fitted The following devices are available from the above list 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Com3 This option determines what type of device is connected to the Com3 connector on the left hand side of the control panel Default No Module Fitted The following devices are available from the above list 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 NOTE 640 only Expansion Port This option determines what type of device is connected to the Expansion Port connector Default No Module Fitted Available Device Types 0 No Module Fitted No Devices 1 AV Module Audio Verification Module 2 iD Module 60IXD iD Module 3 X10 Module X10 Controller 4 Mem
188. is monitored for faults L Panel Lid Tamper The control panel lid tamper is monitored for faults B Battery Faults The battery is monitored for faults Control Timers zt Getions dy Global System Global OFtions Control Timers ions Ort Timers lTi 3 EE Enter the a On time for e g 1152 11 52am Press YES to select the a On Time DAYS OF OPERATION Use keys 1 8 to select the days 1 Sunday through to 7 Saturday 8 Holiday Date e g 1 Sunday Press YES to select the a Off Time Control Timer Za is Off at 12 00 Enter the a Off Time for e g 2134 9 34 pm Control Timer Za is Off at 21534 Timerza OFF Dass Press YES to select the a Off Time DAYS OF OPERATION Use keys 1 8 to select the days e g 3 Tuesday The 48 has 4 control timers and the 88 168 and 640 have 8 control timers Each timer has two ON and OFF times a amp b and can be programmed to operate on any day of the week Once configured the timers can be used to arm or disarm areas lockout users and control outputs Note When programming the Control Timers ON time pressing will bring a up on the display This indicates that the internal sounders will chime every time the Control Timers ON time is reached When programming the Control Timers DAYS of operation pressing will bring HO up on the display T
189. isolate ALL power from the control panel AC Mains and Battery Do not continue if there is power still present on the control panel Note Plugging on the Relay Module with power still present on the control panel may damage the Relay Module control panel or both and invalidate any warranty Plugging on the Relay Module Ensure that the Relay Module is the correct way up see page Error Bookmark not defined 2 Gently press down on the Relay Module until the relay Module is seated correctly 3 Reconnect power to the control panel nena on the Relay Module For plug on operation test the Relay Module in accordance with the control panel instructions 2 To test the auxiliary inputs apply OV to each input in turn and ensure that the correct LED illuminates and a click is heard from the relay Connecting Outputs The RM8 Relay Module has 8 outputs These outputs can be used to drive auxiliary devices such as LED s sounders or communicators etc Each output is a clean contact relay rated at 3A 12V The diagram below shows typical wiring examples for the outputs Premier RM8 Relay Module TS 239995
190. ite Series Installation Manual Engineer Utilities Print Log Data VES to Select EnJineer Util Yes Engineer Utils View Event Log E Engineer Utils Th Print Lod Data Yo Humber of Events gt BERR Enter a value or use the SCROLL key to increase or decrease the value e g 50 Last 50 Events Humber of Events gt Basa Press YES Yes A to print This option allows the Event Log to be printed to a standard RS232 printer see page 41 for details Soak Test Areas 24 48 88 168 WES to Select Endineer Util E Endineer View Even FE ph a ra Endineer Utils Soak Test Areas Soak Test Areas Use keys 1 8 to select areas e g 2 B Use the area key to toggle between areas A to Hand Ito P Press YES to default the option When an area is selected for soak test the soak test timer is started Any zones in the selected area with the soak test attribute will be put on soak test for the duration of the soak test timer see page 63 If the area soak test option is subsequently deselected before the end of the test all zones are returned to normal operation When a zone is on soak test it will not cause an alarm when activated However the system will log the event and will notify the user that the zone has failed soak test A test failure will not prevent the user arm
191. itoring and Fault Reporting Alarm and Fault reporting Remote Support Upload Download Remote Maintenance The connection is via a TTL link to a Com Port on the control panel You will need the following to connect and setup the module e WebWayOne cable 05 0246 e Wintex software The WebWay solution is quick and easy to install and commission with your chosen ARC e n 4 9 Es Si E sim O O H O SI Sich Ala 3 O gt B rane J Ole gt RTN el 5 S E O Si cfg 3 ISIE e ejal elalalalalalelalalelalalalelalalalalalalelelale y Power The Auto Take On process completes the installation The WebWay servers automatically programme the module to work seamlessly with the panel to enable SIA alarms Upload Download and secure remote access using the Texecom Wintex software Automatic SIA 3 with text enriched messages All alarms generated by the Alarm System are automatically sent to the AMS using SIA SIA messages provide a full audit trail of an event which detector location time and date and a permanent record of every alarm Messages for set and unset include who where time and date all recorded Serial Panel Connection Connect the 05 0246 connector cable to the Texecom onto Com Port 1 Com port 2 usuall
192. key is pressed a zone will chime every time it is activated The Walk test menu also includes a last activation log that can be recalled when doing a walk test This log shows zones that have NOT been activated over a period of days Pressing the key will firstly show the zones that still need testing pressing the key a second time will display the zones that have not been activated that day to view zones that have not been activated for 3 days type in 003 the maximum number of days that can be recalled is 255 pressing the key a third time will revert back to the standard walk test display 116 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Engineer Utilities Do Walk Test 640 Engineer DEITS EnJineer Utils View Event Lod EnJineer Utils Do walk test Use the Chime amp Part keys to scroll between Area Groups 1 2 3 amp 4 Use the Area key to select either A H or FP areas Use the numeric buttons 1 8 to toggle the required areas onor off Dreascd gt skis Press CHIME to select Chime Once then lockoutzone Chime on every activation or No Chime atall Zone BES Lounge PIR Press AREA to toggle the dis play between the zones that have been tested and the zones that still need testing ones that need testing are 1 To view zones that have not activated recently enter the number of days required i e 007 will show zones t
193. l be generated by the expander sounder speaker A Alarm Tones On Intruder alarm Tamper alarm and PA alarm tones will be generated by the expander speaker F Fault Tones On Fault tones will be generated by the expander speaker S Service Tone On Service and Warning tones will be generated by the expander speaker E Entry Tones On Entry tones will be generated by the expander speaker X Exit Tones On Exit tones will be generated by the expander speaker E Chime Tones On Chime 1 2 and 3 tones will be generated by the expander speaker 76 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual System Outputs 5 6 System Outputs System Outputs Panel Outputs Use keys 1 8toselectan output type or use the SCROLL key to search e g 1 Digi Outputs Areat d 1 ABCDEFGHIJELMAOP Use the Chime 8 Part keys to scroll between 1 1 1 1 1 1 System Outruts 1 1 Area Groups 1 2 3 amp 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Digi Outputs Areat d d ABCDEFGHS tees Em Ear Use the Area key to select either AH or I P areas Use the numeric buttons 1 8 to toggle the required areas on or off Enter Output Number e g 3 Press YES to edit the selected option E WIER Enter User Code Number e g 016 Digi Outrut 3 User Ture Digi Outrut Enter
194. ld this button for 7 seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer code to the factory setting of A D Ga Note Loading the factory defaults can take up to 30 seconds to complete Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been locked For a complete list of factory defaults see the Quick Reference Guide supplied on the enclosed CD 12 Auxiliary Fault Connections These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an auxiliary device see page 33 for details 13 Loudspeaker Connections These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 8Q or two 16Q loudspeakers 14 Panel Outputs Outputs 1 8 2 are 500mA ve These outputs are all fully programmable 12 W amp 24 W only output 1 15 Zone Connections 4 Fully programmable zone inputs 16 Ricochet Network LED s Green LED Data received by the expander from the panel Red LED Data transmitted by the expander to the panel The flash rate depends on the mode and RF activity 17 Enable 2 wire smoke Panel Output 1 can be used for connecting up to 10 12V 2 Wire smoke detectors not 12 W 18 Options Switch Use to select the receiver functionality Switch 1 OFF not used on 48 W Switch 2 OFF 24 W amp 48 W Ricochet Mode ON Not Used Switch 3 ON Impaq Contact W Wired Input 2 will report as Tamper default OFF input 2 will report as an Alarm Switch 4 OFF Walk test 12 INS176 10 Premie
195. lity of the Premier Elite SmartKey after all devices have been placed will ensure that the Premier Elite SmartKey performs as expected and works in locations where the user would expect it too Route By The Route By function allows you to select which Zones and therefore expander the Premier Elite SmartKey will use on the system for its routeing This should be selected BEFORE the device has been learned In the examples below Fig 1 shows the zones associated with Expander 1 which is a 32XP W and Fig 2 shows Expander 2 which is also a 32XP W when using 8XP W there willobviously be less devices that the Premier Elite SmartKey can use Useri Route Bu ones HES Bda Fig 1 UserG l Route By Zones 641 Dez Fig 2 The key is used to select this menu and the key used to select which expander and associated zones will be used Once a Premier Elite SmartKey has been learned the key will show which zones are being used for routeing It is not possible to alter this once learned To change the routeing the Premier Elite SmartKey should be deleted and the process started from the beginning Deleting a Premier Elite SmartKey Deleting the Premier Elite SmartKey from the user is a similar process to learning at the appropriate point in the menu press followed by amp the Premier Elite SmartKey will be removed from the User To delete all user data see INS176 8 or later YES to Selecti Setur Us
196. ll not accept any key presses When the zone is secured all keypads respond as normal 18 Omit Key This zone type will isolate any zone assigned to the same area as long as it has the Omit attribute 19 Custom This zone type can be programmed to operate as required using its own set of attributes see page 53 for details 20 Conf PA audible This zone type is for use with multi action PA buttons or where a confirmed PA is required and will activate local sounders 21 Conf PA silent This zone type is for use with multi action PA buttons or where a confirmed PA is required and will not activate local sounders INS176 10 51 Zone Setup Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Zone Attributes 1 Attributes can be assigned to a zone to alter its operation i e a Guard zone with the Access attribute will allow the user to walk past the detector without causing a Fault during the exit mode or an Intruder alarm during the entry mode Select attributes by pressing keys 1 to 8 a letter on the display means the attribute is selected a Dot on the display means the attribute is not selected The following attributes are available O OMITTABLE Zones with this attribute can be manually omitted Zones without this attribute cannot be manually omitted F FORCE OMIT Zones with this attribute will be omitted if they are not secure at the end of the exit mode Zones without this attribute w
197. location this is critical on larger systems where multiple expanders are being used NOTE Devices should be at least 30cm s away from the receiver when being learned Placing Devices Once all of the devices have been learnt they will need placing in their desired location this should be done by installing devices closest to the expander first and then working outwards so that the last devices installed are those furthest away from the expander Make sure to install devices with the expander in Commission mode See INS467 for details Devices also have a commission mode which will indicate a secure and valid path of communication to the receiver See INS467 for details NOTE You should wait at least 15 minutes after installing the last device to make sure routing has been correctly established between all system devices NOTE For maximum reliability and system integrity avoid long and thin set ups NOTE Devices are capable of hopping through up to two other devices or a maximum of three hops PCB Layout O l 7 OV T i a d BE 5 00000000 45 H a 12341234 a gt H E INS176 10 23 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual 1 Engineers Keypad Connection An engineer s keypad Premier Elite LCD keypad and interface lead can be temp
198. m area is armed or disarmed The panel will also report a 24 Hour Gas alarm to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using Contact ID reporting 12 Auxiliary This zone type will cause a Silent alarm if it is activated when the system area is armed or disarmed The panel will also report an Auxiliary alarm to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using Contact ID reporting 13 Tamper This zone type will cause an Internal alarm if it is activated when the system area is disarmed and will cause an Intruder alarm when the system area is armed 14 Exit Terminator This zone type is used to finalise the arming procedure when arming the system area see page 56 for details 15 Moment Key This zone type can be used to arm and disarm one or more areas When the zone is activated and then secured the areas assigned to the zone will arm When the zone is subsequently activated and then secured the system will disarm the areas assigned to the zone Tamper faults will not arm or disarm anything but will cause a Tamper alarm 16 Latch Key This zone type can be used to arm and disarm one or more areas When the zone is activated the areas assigned to the zone will arm When the zone is secured areas assigned to the zone will disarm Tamper faults will not arm or disarm anything but will cause a Tamper alarm 17 Security This zone type can be used to Lockout keypads When the zone is activated keypads assigned to the same area wi
199. m occurring in the selected area and the Bell Strobe output activating 6 Bell Duration This timer controls the duration of the Bell output after an Intruder alarm has occurred in the selected area and any programmed Bell Delay has expired 7 Coms Delay This timer controls the delay between an Intruder alarm occurring in the selected area and the communicator reporting to the Alarm Receiving Centre 8 Part Bell Dly for Areas A to D A to H A to P When the selected area is Part Armed this timer controls the delay between an Intruder alarm occurring in the selected area and the Bell Strobe output activating the internal sounders will also sound during this time as a warning 9 Confirm PA Timer for Areas A to B A to D A to H A to P 1A to 4P When a Panic Alarm is raised in any area a confirm PA timer is started for that specific area If a second PA alarm including tamper from any other device in the same area is raised while the PA timer is active a Confirmed PA Alarm is raised INS176 10 55 Area Programming Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Arming Modes ES to Selecti d Programming Hrea Area Programming Timers Area A Arm bat Timed exit O Use the SCROLL key to selectan area Tp Use keys 1 5 to select an arming mode e g 1 Entry xt AS The way that an area arms can be configured for any of the following options 1 E
200. mally Closed Contact or N C contact Zone wiring options are provided for each Testing Zones To test zones prior to commissioning use the View Zone Status option in Engineers Utilities see page 117 INS176 10 31 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual 60IXD Zone Expander The 60iXD expander provides the following facilities e Two iD loops each supporting up to 30 biscuits e Fused 12V output for powering detectors e Engineer s keypad port for local iD diagnostics Installation Before connecting the 60 XD expander module isolate ALL power from the control panel AC mains and battery do not continue if there is still power present on the control panel 1 Connect the iD expander to the control panel see 60iXD installation manual INS261 for details 2 Connect the iD devices to the expander module see iD Connections 3 Reapply power to the control panel and program the necessary options on the panel see 60 XD installation manual INS261 for details iD Connections Each iD biscuit is connected across a two wire detector loop Apart from observing the correct polarity any wiring configuration can be used as shown in the diagram below 60iXD LOOP 1 LOOP2 As LOOP 1 Tep fa en a G Gl The 60iXD expander module is supplied with 4 off 10nF capacitors in the spares pack It is recommended that you connect a 10nF capacitor approximately at the half
201. maximum number of devices that can be connected in total will depend on the control panel fitted Whenever new devices are connected to the networks they must be confirmed onto the system using the Confirm Devices menu option see page 118 for details Wiring the Network The networks are made up of four terminals incorporating power and data To ensure correct operation all four terminals on the device must be connected to the corresponding terminals on the control panel or previous device see Figure 1 page 21 for details The table below shows each terminal and its description Terminal Description 12V Supply OV Supply T Transmit Data R Receive Data Devices can be connected using 4 core cable However it is recommended that 6 or 8 core cable is used as the spare cores can be used to Double Up on the power connections if needed ch Standard 7 0 2 alarm cable can be used for most installations However under certain conditions it may be necessary to use screened cable Cable Distances The maximum recommended distance for devices when using standard 7 0 2 alarm cable is e 250m for each branch when using the star parallel configuration e When using a daisy chain series configuration the maximum distance will depend on the number of devices connected on the chain The more devices that are connected the shorter the distance to the last device this is due to voltage drop in the cable
202. me information can then be quickly pasted to the other zone The information held in memory after programming an item can only be pasted into an item of the same type and cannot be used once another option is selected i e Zone programming information cannot be pasted into Timers etc Log Off Engineer Whenever the Engineer Programming menu is exited by pressing twice the display will look like this Alarm Engineer bee Tue 86 Mar 2885 Working On Site This message will remain on the display until the Engineer logs out of the Programming menu To log out of Engineer Programming menu proceed as follows Enter an Engineer code DODOL the display should look like this YES to Selectii Zone Setur Press or Geset the display should look like this WES to Selectii Lod off ENGINEER Press to return to normal the display will look something like this Tue 86 Mar 2061 The Engineer is now logged out of the Programming menu Nore The Engineer will be automatically logged out when the Engineer Logoff Delay Timer Expires See Page 64 Resetting the Engineers Code User 00 If the Engineer code User 00 has been lost or forgotten it can normally be reset back to the factory default of a Ga However this can only be done if the NVM has not been locked see page 65 for details To Reset the Engineer code User 00 ENSURE THAT THE LID TAMPER IS CLOSED Hold down the Factory Default button for 6
203. med when an ATS fault occurs in those areas see option 15 Areas not assigned to Arm With No ATS can never be armed when an ATS fault occurs in those areas see option 15 16 AC Mains Fail Areas assigned to AC Mains Fail will respond as follows when an AC mains failure occurs e All keypads will display AC Mains Fail e All keypads and speakers assigned to the same area as the AC Mains Fail will generate a Service tone every minute until the fault is acknowledged by the User entering a valid code for that area e An assigned area can be armed as long as Arm With AC Fail is also assigned to that area see option 18 However a warning will be given to indicate the problem Areas not assigned to AC Mains Fail will never be affected by an AC mains failure 17 Arm with AC Fail Areas assigned to Arm With AC Fail can be armed when an AC Mains fail occurs in those areas see option 17 Areas not assigned to Arm With AC Fail can never be armed when an AC Mains fail occurs in those areas see option 17 18 Full Arm Coms Areas assigned to Full Arm Coms will respond as follows INS176 10 59 Area Programming Premier Elite Series Installation Manual e If the selected area is fully armed and an Intruder alarm occurs in that area Intruder alarm events for that area are reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre after any programmed Digi delay has expired Areas
204. mini Account P77 Enter yourGemini Radio Account Num ber PSTN Account EE Enter your PSTN Acc ount Number The system will now download the configura gon file s from the CSLservers DO NOT press this option more than once Test Calls Ho The system will now test all enabled com munication paths and report PASS or FAIL for each 96 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL amp Digi Options EMIZON 21 TCD Introduction The EMIZON 21 TCD is compatible with all Premier Elite Control Panels PCB Layout PSTN Connection to RS232 RS485 phone or panel Secondary path LED Primary path LED Power LED GPRS TCD serial activity LED number on label Mode Button GPRS aerial Connection Set Button Ethernet port 16 pin Inputs incl Power A Ethernet activi BSIA Form 175 supply Relay LED H inputs Outputs PC COM to TCD Connection The Emizon 21 connects to the panels Via the PC COM lead NOTE Order Part Number JAA 0001 This lead converts the TTL port to standard RS232 You will need to remove the 9 way D Type serial connector on the PC COM adaptor and connect the following wires to the TCD RS232 terminals as shown in the table below Cut Here emo gt PC Com EMIZON 21 Black Wire TCD GND Yellow Wire TCD TX Blue Wire TCD RX Once you have connected the
205. mman Example gt 5678 arm s arm all areas and report 2297 arm areaslls lusch statis P Part Arm System 227 parm 12209 Lef Par arm 1 all areas no Disarm System 222 darm areas s ta Se eg disarm aress abo and Reset System 5678 reset reset all areas Arm System Omit Zone s 5678 omit 1 5 12 omit zones 1 5 and 12 Unomit Zone s 222 uomit zones 5678 uomit 12 reinstate zone 12 2222 op on 5678 op on 134 turn PC outputs 1 3 outputs s and 4 on 2222 op off 5678 op off 4s turn PC output 4 off and outputs s report back status 2227 Ce Pulse Outputs On et op on outputs 5678 op on p pulse PC output 2 on 2222 Pulse Outputs Off ei op off outputs 5678 op off p pulse PC output 2 off 5678 mess How Are You Displays How 2222 5678 status Armed 1 8 or A P Alarm 1 8 or A P Output 1 8 Mains OK or Fault Battery OK or Fault Phone Line OK or Fault 5678 status O Alarm A P Channels 1 8 222 status O Digi 1 8 Panel 1 5 Mains OK or Fault Battery OK or Fault Phone Line OK or Fault 5678 status R Serial only if Radio Pad fitted NUA only if Radio Pad fitted GSM Radio Pad 2222 status R FSS only if Radio Pad fitted Status RSS only if Radio Pad fitted BER only if Radio Pad fitted CRC only if
206. n 8 1V electronic PTC Over voltage protection trigger 16V F2 900mA Digicom Power electronic Fuses F1 900mA Auxiliary 12V Power fuse PTC electronic PTC F3 900mA Network 1 fuse electronic F2 900mA Digicom Power electronic PTC PTC F4 900mA Bell Strobe fuse F3 900mA Network 1 fuse electronic electronic PTC PTC F6 1 6 Amp Battery fuse electronic F4 900mA Bell Strobe fuse PTC electronic PTC F6 1 6 Amp Battery fuse electronic PTC Housing 1mm Mild Steel Dimensions W x H x D 315mm x 415mm x 100mm Battery Compartment Up tp one 18Ah battery Housing 3mm Polycarbonate Packed Weight 4 5 Kg Approx Dimensions W x H x D 305mm x 263mm x 98mm Battery Compartment One 12V 7 0Ah battery Packed Weight 1 5 Kg Approx P J Elit 1 2 24 48 w A remier Elite z Premier Elite 24 Metal Current Current Current Consumption 150mA Current Consumption 95mA Maximum Current Available 128 INS176 10 Specifications Premier Elite Series Installation Manual E se a Power Supply Type A Rated Input 220V 240V 50 60Hz 1A Rated Output Current 40 C 2 5A MAX Rated Input 100VV 120V 50 60Hz 1A Rated Output Current 40 C 2 3A MAX Rated Output Voltage 13 8Vdc 2 Mains Terminal Block Fuse 250Vac 3 3 15A Slow Medium Blow Maximum rating of each power output note that these are not considered to
207. n the selected area is disarmed 46 Time Arming This output type activates for 5 minutes prior to the selected area being armed using the Control Timers 47 1 Code Entered This output type activates for 30 seconds when a User code with the Dual Code attribute is entered for the selected area 48 2 Code Entered This output type activates for 30 seconds when two User codes with the Dual Code attribute are entered for the selected area 49 Area Secured This output type activates whenever a Security Key zone type is used to lock keypads out and deactivates when the keypads are unlocked again 50 Part Armed 1 This output type activates when a Part Arm 1 is selected for the selected area and deactivates when part arm 1 is disarmed 51 Part Armed 2 This output type activates when a Part Arm 2 is selected for the selected area and deactivates when part arm 2 is disarmed 52 Part Armed 3 This output type activates when a Part Arm 3 is selected for the selected area and deactivates when part arm 3 is disarmed 53 Custom Alarm This output type activates when any Custom zone type causes an alarm in the selected area and deactivates when a valid user code is entered 54 Zone Warnin This output type activates when Custom zone type in the selected area with the Warning Req attribute see page 53 for details is activated for the duration of the Warning Delay timer see page
208. nd deactivates at the end of the Confirmation time when a code is entered within the Abort time or when the alarm is reset 05 24Hr Audible This output type activates when a zone programmed as 24Hr Audible causes an Internal alarm or Intruder alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 06 24Hr Silent This output type activates when a zone programmed as 24Hr Silent causes a silent alarm or Intruder alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 07 24Hr Gas This output type activates when a zone programmed as 24Hr Gas causes a Silent alarm or Intruder alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 08 PA Alarm This output type activates when any type of PA alarm i e PA audible PA silent or Duress causes a PA alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 09 PA Silent This output type activates when a zone programmed as PA Silent or a keypad PA 1 amp 3 causes a silent PA alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 10 Duress This output type activates when a User code with the Duress attribute causes a silent PA alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset 11 Fire Alarm This output type activates when a zone programmed as Fire or a keypad Fire 4 amp 6 causes a Fire alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm
209. nection for the keypads and zone expanders The and terminals provide power whilst the T transmits data and R receives data see page 20 for details 7 External Sounder Connections These terminals are used for connecting to an external sounder unit see page 33 for details 8 Auxiliary Fault Connections These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an auxiliary device see page 33 for details 9 Loudspeaker Connections These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 16 or two 8 loudspeakers see page 33 for details O N O COM NK Lops o 2 2 rs 3 co Bell 12V Fault Tx R DAY POLO EFR i a e R NETWORK NETWORK 6 o NETWORK 7 NETWORK 8 GO 10 Auxiliary 12V Power These terminals are for connecting devices that require 12V power protected by a 1A fuse 11 Panel Outputs Outputs 1 8 2 are 500mA ve applied outputs 3 8 4 are 500mA ve applied and output 5 is a clean contact relay see page 34 for wiring details These outputs are all fully programmable see page 77 for details 12 Plug on Communicator Connections This socket provides connection for the plug on communicator see page 36 for details 13 Box Tamper Connection The box tamper micro switch is connected here The micro switch provides tamper protection for the main control panel in case of unauthorised access To disable the box tamper remove the micro switch le
210. nes Control Panel Premier Elite 24 Premier Elite 12 24 amp 48 W e 8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones e 4 Onboard Zones e Expandable to 24 zones via keypads and zone expanders e 8wireless device Ricochet enabled receiver onboard 12 24 W e 1x 4 wire data network standard 7 0 2 alarm cable e 32 wireless device Ricochet enabled receiver onboard 48 W e Upto 4 keypads and 2 zone expanders e Expandable to 16 24 48 zones via keypads and zone expanders e Upto 1 output module e 1x4 wire data network standard 7 0 2 alarm cable e 2 independent areas each with 3 part arms e 2 4 keypads and 0 2 3 zone expanders e 2areaarm suites e 1 2 output modules e 25 programmable User codes e 2or 4 independent areas each with 3 part arms e 500 Event Log time amp date stamped e 2or4 area arm suites e 1 programmable panel outputs 1 x 100mA e 8 25 50 programmable User codes e 1 5 Amp power supply plastic Case e 250 500 Event Log time amp date stamped e 1 or 2 programmable panel outputs 2 x 500mA Premier Elite 48 e 8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones e 1 5 Amp power supply Premier Elite 88 e 8 fully programmable Double Pole or End Of Line zones e Expandable to 48 zones via keypads and zone expanders e 1x 4 wire data network standard 7 0 2 alarm cable e Upto4 keypads and 4 zone expanders e Expandable to 88 zones via keypads and zone expanders e Up to 2 output modules e 1x 4 wire d
211. nk e Dialling Attempts Program as required f Report Areas Program as required g Reports Program as required h Config Program as required i Protocol Options Program as required j UDL Options Change rings before answer to 1 if using GSM Upload Download 4 All three status LED s should now be on if status LED 3 is off or flashing this indicates a low GSM signal level If the signal level is low try moving the antenna to improve the reception Using the SMS Control Commands Control commands can be sent to allow remote control and interrogation of the alarm system 1 Select the send text message option on your mobile telephone 2 Enter the telephone number of the Premier Elite ComGSM module 3 Enter the text command see SMS Control Commands 4 Select send on your mobile telephone When using the SMS Control Commands shown in the tables below the following should be noted 222 User code this must proceed all commands areas Areas 1 to 8 or A to P If the areas are not specified then all areas will be selected s Send back status report zones List of zones each zone must separated by a space e g 1 12 167 etc outputs List of outputs e g 1234 etc message A maximum of 32 characters 38 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation Premier 48 88 168 640 8 Premier Elite 24 48 88 168 640 SMS Control Commands Operation Co
212. ns System Timers Grat Detiene Global OFtions System Timers Use the YES key to move Qes to the next timer or use the SC ROLL key to search gt Enter a new timer value G gt e g 005 5 Minutes gal RE BS oe These timers control various timing and delay functions Each timer can be programmed for any value between 000 and 999 O Exit Settle Time When using the Entry Exit or Exit Terminator arming mode some detectors along the exit route can remain active for a number of seconds following activation This timer ensures that the detectors are given time to deactivate before the system area arms 1 Global Bell Dly This timer controls the delay between an Intruder alarm occurring and the Bell Strobe output activating 2 Global Bell Dur This timer controls the duration of the Bell output after an alarm has occurred and any programmed Global Bell Delay time has expired 3 Double Knock Div If a zone has the Double Knock attribute an alarm will only occur if the zone activates twice within this time window or once for the duration of this time window Nore H multi knocks has been set up see page 68 for details the zone may have to be activated more than twice 4 Beam Pair Time If a zone has the Beam Pair attribute an alarm will only occur if another zone with the Beam Pair
213. nt Logs which are time and date stamped The first log which is a system log records all events that occur on the system i e Users entering their codes to arm or disarm areas alarm events failures to arm etc The second log which is an alarm log only records alarm events that occur on the system The third log is the Mandatory Event log which records only events defined as mandatory by EN50131 The System Log records the last 500 48 1000 88 or 2000 168 events The Alarm Log records the last 32 alarm events The Mandatory Log records the last 500 mandatory events Event Log Hotkeys When viewing the system log there are 9 hotkeys available These hotkeys allow certain events to be found easier without the need for searching The following hotkeys are available a Priority Alarms PA Fire etc Normal Alarms Guard 24hr Entry Exit etc Opens and Closings Arm Disarm etc Omits and Reinstates Zone Omits etc Gi Maintenance System Tests Engineer Program etc Tampers Zone Bell Aux etc Test Calls Communicator Active successful etc Entry Exit Entry and Exit Procedures User Codes User codes being used INS176 10 113 Engineer Utilities Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Event Log Descriptions Log Event Description ARM FAILED An exit fault from Zone has caused the system to fail to arm Fit Alarm Zone has detected a Fault
214. nt the display will look like Fig 2 if not then it will look like Fig 3 one GES Learn Free AP WOI ol Fig 3 Deleting Devices To delete devices from the expander is the same as learning them choose the zone you wish to delete and follow the procedure to learn the device when the screen shows Learning press Learning Devices Yes to Selectii Zone Setur _ gone Dpn Texti Co Ces Fone BAL FanelAl Enter zone number Hot Used e g 009 Zone 009 Zone B99 Chime Silent Co Yes Zone BAS Pol al m Hot Used Loes Zone D Test LoD Remote Test OFF Yes Zone BAD Mode Hybrid H Qwo Yes Zone BAS Grouri S Gwo Zone 889 Learn Learning 28s Use the scroll key No eses OL to selectthe next zone to learn a device too Zone B18 Learnt Free P B a ag No Reset Cres RE Please refer to previous page for details on programming these options INS176 10 49 Zone Setup Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Ricochet Enabled Devices V2 10 8 Later The Premier Elite Series of control panels have been upgraded with a new learn delete function for devices The new Ricochet Learn delete process is Easier amp Smarter and is in addition to the existing methods provided devices can be learned right from first power up of the control panel o
215. ntry Exit The area will arm after the Entry Exit door has been closed and the Exit Settle timer has expired 2 Exit Term The area will arm after the Entry Exit door has been closed the Exit Terminator button has been pressed and the Exit Settle timer has expired 3 Timed Exit The area will arm after the programmed Exit Time has expired Note f an Exit Terminator zone is activated at any point during the exit mode any remaining exit time is cancelled and the area will arm immediately 4 Instant The area will arm instantly 5 Deferred The area will arm after the programmed Exit Time has expired However if any zones not on the exit route are activated during the exit mode the Exit Time is restarted Area Arm Suites 24 48 88 168 YES to Selecti Area ProSranmmin93 Ares Programming Timers Area ProSrammind Area Arm Suites Ares Arm Suite 1 Use keys 1 8 to selectan Area Arm S uite or use the SCROLL key to search e g 4 Press NO to edit the Part Arm Suite Use keys 1 8 to selectan area e g 3 C Use the AREA key to toggle between areas A to Hand to P Area ai Suite 4 rga al ech Area Arm Suite 4 gt ECD W The 24 has 2 Area Arm Suites the 48 has 4 Area Arm Suites the 88 has 8 Area Arm Suites the 768 has 16 Area Arm Suites Any number of areas can be assigned to each suite Areas assigned to an Area Arm Suite will be
216. ntry or exit mode 21 Armed This output type activates when the selected area is armed and deactivates when the selected area is disarmed 22 Full Armed This output type activates when the selected area is fully armed and deactivates when the selected area is disarmed 23 Part Armed This output type activates when the selected area is part armed and deactivates when the selected area is disarmed 24 Part Arming This output type activates when the selected area is part arming and deactivates when the selected area arms 25 Force Armable This output type activates when the selected area has at least one zone with the Force Omit attribute and the area is able to be force armed It will deactivate when the area cannot be force armed 26 Force Armed This output type activates when the selected area is forced to arm with zones active and deactivates when all zones are reinstated 27 Arm Failed This output type activates when the selected area fails to arm because a zone is in fault and deactivates when a valid User code is entered 28 Bell SAB This output type activates when an External alarm occurs in the selected area and deactivates when area is disarmed or the Bell Duration timer expires 29 Bell SCB This output type deactivates when an External alarm occurs in the selected area and activates when area is disarmed or the Bell Duration timer expires 30 Strobe This output type
217. nual 70 Confirmed PA If an area is in PA alarm this output type activates when one of the following happens NOTE another PA zone is activated NOTE A tamper is detected from a different device NOTE A second signal from a multi action PA NOTE A global tamper within the timer period 71 Confirmed Intruder If an area is in Alarm this output type activates when a different zone not the entry route is activated in the same area This output type deactivates at the end of the confirmation time when a valid code is entered within the Abort time or when the alarm is reset Output Group Zone Any zone can be assigned to this output type Select a zone number then select an output type from the following options Mimic This output type activates when the selected zone is activated and deactivates when the zone is secure This output will work if the zone is armed or disarmed MimicArm This output type activates when the selected zone is activated and deactivates when the zone is secured This output will only work if the zone is armed Alarm This output type activates when the selected zone causes an alarm and deactivates when the alarm is reset This output will only work if the zone is armed Tamper This output type activates when the selected zone causes a Tamper alarm and deactivates when the tamper is reset This output will work if the zone is armed or disarmed MimicLat This output type activates when
218. nual Power Supply Ratings If installing to EN50131 or PD6662 the system standby times in the event of a mains power failure vary depending on the grade and how AC fail is signalled NOTE When calculating the current consumption of the system you must include the current taken by the control panel and all the devices that it powers If the total current exceeds the Rated Output for the grade you are installing to then an additional power supply is required Premier Elite 24 Metal Standby and Recharge Times EN50131 1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Current Minimum Standby 12h 12h 30h Current Consumption 95mA Period Maximum Current Available Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs 0 75A charge 1 0A Time 0 3A charge 1 9A PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs Rated Output Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs Battery Rated Output Amps Time Arrangement 2ah San 30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC otherwise 60h 1x 7Ah 0 19A 0 13A 0 61A 0 47A This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC AA 0 61A 0 47A Jumper Settings Standby and Recharge Times Battery Recharge EN50131 1 Arrangement Time Minimum Standby 1x 7Ah lt 24Hrs 0 3A Period lt 24Hrs 0 75A 1x17Ah Maximum Recharge ie lt 72Hrs 0 3A Time PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs Premier Elite 640 Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 H
219. nual Type Event Reporting Group Contact ID Test Call Passed Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported Test Call Failed Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported Zone Fault Alarm Maintenance Zone No Restore Restore Zone No Zone Masked Alarm Alarm Zone No Restore Restore Zone No Faults Overridden Alarm Maintenance 000 Restore Not Reported 000 PSU AC Fail Alarm Maintenance Device No Restore Restore Device No PSU Low Battery Fail Alarm Maintenance Device No Restore Restore Device No PSU Low Output Fail Alarm Maintenance Device No Restore Restore Device No PSU Tamper Alarm Tamper Device No Restore Restore Device No Door Access Alarm Open Device No Restore Not Reported CIE Reset Alarm Maintenenace 000 Restore Not Reported 000 Remote Command Via Com Port User Added Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported User Deleted Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported Confirmed PA Alarm Priority Alarm Restore Not Reported User Ack Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported Power Unit Failures Alarm Maintenance Alarm Restore Maintenance Restore Charger Fault Alarm Maintenance Alarm Restore Maintenance Restore 106 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL amp Digi Options Tamper Fault ID Reset ID Panel ID is transmitted as follows Reset ID is transmitted as follows Device Device
220. ny Entry Exit 1 or 2 zone with the Entry Exit 2 attribute to become a Guard zone for the duration of the Forced Entry timer Zones without this attribute will respond as normal Zone Attributes 2 Select attributes by pressing keys 1 to 8 a letter on the display means the attribute is selected a Dot on the display means the attribute is not selected The following attributes are available D DOUBLE KNOCK Zones with this attribute will only cause an alarm if it is activated twice within the Double Knock time window or for the duration of the time window Zones without this attribute will respond as normal B BEAM PAIR Zones with this attribute will only cause an alarm if two zones assigned to the same area with this attribute are activated within the Beam Pair time window Zones without this attribute will respond as normal T ON TEST Zones with this attribute will be put on soak test for the duration of the soak test timer see page 63 when the area soak test option is selected see page 121 Zones without this attribute will respond as normal A ACTIVITY Zones with this attribute will cause an activity fault to be displayed at the time of arming if they have not been activated during the Activity Delay period If Config option 14 see page 65 for details has been set to Activity Fault Bar the system area cannot be armed until the zone has been activated fo
221. o SE oh the Modem speed selectthe required speed Sa Modem Speed 2468 Modem Speed Modem Speed 4868 Oo 9608 Press RESET to resetCom 1 I Press RESET to resetCom 2 INS176 10 93 UDL amp Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual The following options are used when a Paknet Radio Pad is connected to the control panel in order to achieve DUAL SIGNALLING to an Alarm Receiving Centre when a MODEM External PC or Com2400 is used to connect to the control panel or send SMS messages to mobile phones when an AV Module is connected to the control panel in order to achieve AUDIO VERIFICATION to an Alarm Receiving Centre or when a TCP IP Module is connected for communications over a Broadband ADSL DSL Line Setup Radio Pad Pad ARC 1 Pri No This is the first number that is used by the Radio Pad for reporting events to ARC 1 Pad ARC 1 Sec No This is the second number that is used by the Radio Pad for reporting events to ARC 1 Pad ARC 1 Prefix This number will prefix the account number for ARC 1 Pad ARC 2 Pri No This is the first number that is used by the Radio Pad for reporting events to ARC 2 Pad ARC 2 Sec No This is the second number that is used by the Radio Pad for reporting events to ARC 2 Pad ARC 2 Prefix This number will prefix the account number for ARC 2 Pad ARC 3 Pri No This is the first number that is used by the Radio
222. o report events to the selected Alarm Receiving Centre T Send SIA Text Text is sent to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using SIA II this makes the protocol SIA III 88 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL amp Digi Options Digi Options UDL Didi OFtions Reset Didi LD DO OFtions DiFi DFtions Press NO to edit the Digi option Use keys 1 8 to select an option or use the SCROLL key to search Press NO to select deselect the option Blind Dialling mou w e e Yes There are 6 options that control how the plug on communicator works Select options by pressing keys 1 to 8 a letter on the display means the option is selected a Dot on the display means the option is not selected E Digi is Enabled The plug on communicator will report all system events to the Alarm Receiving Centre Area Accounts 24 48 88 168 UBC Bis ARE fons UDL Didi OFtians Reset Didi Use keys 1 8 to selectan area or use the SCROLL key to searche g 2 AreaB Press NO to edit the accountnumber Use keys 0 9 to enter the account number e g 1234 Account 1234 Area E od on Yes When using Fast Format Contact ID or SIA each area can have its own account number to identify events Account Numbers A to H I to P This is the account number that will be reported to the Alarm Receiving
223. oad with incorrect site details more than three times and deactivates after 4 hours or after a valid User code is entered 19 UDL Call Active This output type activates when an upload download is started and deactivates when the upload download finishes 20 UDL Enabled This output type activates when Enable UDL Engineer is enabled and deactivates when Enable UDL Engineer is disabled see page 111 for details 21 Confirmed Alarm If the system is already in alarm this output type activates when a different zone not on the entry route is activated and deactivates at the end of the Confirmation time when a code is entered within the Abort time or when the alarm is reset 22 Custom1 Stage A This output type operates when Custom Output 1 Stage A activates and deactivates when Custom Output 1 Stage A deactivates 23 Custom1 Stage B This output type operates when Custom Output 1 Stage B activates and deactivates when Custom Output 1 Stage B deactivates 24 Custom1 Stage AB This output type operates when Custom Output 1 Stage A or B activates and deactivates when Custom Output 1 Stage A deactivates 25 Custom2 Stage A This output type operates when Custom Output 2 Stage A activates and deactivates when Custom Output 2 Stage A deactivates 26 Custom2 Stage B This output type operates when Custom Output 2 Stage B activates and deactivat
224. one type will cause an internal alarm if it is activated when the system area is disarmed and will cause an Intruder alarm when the system area is armed The panel will also report a 24 Hour alarm to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using Contact ID reporting 6 24Hr Silent This zone type will cause a silent alarm if it is activated when the system area is disarmed and will cause an Intruder alarm when the system area is armed The panel will also report a 24 Hour Alarm to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using Contact ID reporting 7 PA Audible Normally used for monitoring Panic or hold up alarms This zone type will cause a Panic alarm if it is activated when the system area is armed or disarmed 8 PA Silent Normally used for monitoring Panic or hold up alarms This zone type will cause a silent Panic alarm if it is activated when the system area is armed or disarmed 9 Fire Normally used for monitoring smoke detectors This zone type will cause a Fire alarm with distinctive fire tone if it is activated when the system area is armed or disarmed In addition the bell output will pulse 10 Medical This zone type will cause a Silent alarm if it is activated when the system area is armed or disarmed The panel will also report a Medical alarm to the Alarm Receiving Centre when using Contact ID reporting 11 24Hr Gas This zone type will cause an Audible alarm if it is activated when the syste
225. onnection for the keypads and zone expanders The and terminals provide power whilst the T transmits data and R receives data see page 20 for details The red LED indicates that data is flowing out of the control panel and normally flashes very quickly The green LED indicates that data is flowing into the control panel and normally flashes slowly the green LED flashes faster as more devices are connected see page 20 for details 8 Panel Output 1 OP1 is a low current 500mA ve applied output see page 34 for wiring details The output is also fully programmable see page 78 for programming details 9 SPK Loudspeaker Connection These terminals can be used for connecting up to one 16Q or two 8Q loudspeakers see page 33 for wiring details 10 Auxiliary 12V Power These terminals are for connecting devices that require 12V power protected by a 1A fuse 11 Auxiliary Fault Connections These terminals can be used for monitoring the tamper loop of an auxiliary device see page 33 for details 12 Programmable Zones 1 8 These terminals provide the connections for the zones see page 31 for wiring details Each zone is fully programmable see page 48 for details 13 Expander Port The expansion port is used for plugging on a local zone expander see page 23 for details 14 Com Port 2 Com Port 2 is a serial communications port and can be used for connecting a PC running Wintex or any s
226. or 640 see below Exrtl 5S Areas Espa tl 5 ExP tl 5 Areas ESE gt Alek gt ABA Press NO to Use the keypad to program edit the text the same way thata expander text mobile phone works Edit Text ABC Use the SCROLL key to select an input type Press NO to edit the Auxiliary Input Exp 1 37Aux LP Ep zl Du IP ExP 1 53hux IP Hot Used Hot Used Auxiliary Tamer Use the SCROLL key to adjust the volume level Press NO to edit the expander Volume level Exe t1 5 Volumes Volume 35 EsP 15 Uolume Volume gt 4 Exe pl D Volume Volume 4 Press No Use keys 1 8 to select Press No to to editthe a sounder option or use the select deselect the sounder options SCROLL key to search sounder option Entes Tones EE Entes Tones Ep Fl D Soundsi 5 E FAFSEXC FOR SE SE ExP l 1 Areasl Use the amp key to switch A between Area Groups 1 2 3 amp 4 Use the Chime EsP 1 1 Areasi Part keys ABCDEFGHS sete to scroll between Area Groups 1 2 3 8 4 Use the Area key to select either A H or FP areas EXP lal Aressi Use the numeric buttons 1 8 to sek gt TE MHOP toggle the required areas on or off INS176 10 75 Expander Setup Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Expander Areas Expanders can be assigned to any number of areas assigning an expander to an area determines e Which areas the speaker output on the expand
227. or Panel NC Line Fault C L M NO R R Power 12y DC V DES 1 1 2 2 Channel Inputs 2 3 A Programmed 4 4 Digicom as Positive 5 5 Outpus Removed 6 6 7 7 8 8 Note For details on testing the digicom outputs see page 114 34 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation 2 Wire Smoke Detector Panel Output 1 can be used for connecting up to 10 12V 2 Wire smoke detectors A Maximum of 10 2 Wire Smoke Detectors Remote LED Control can be connected to panel output 1 Optional Panel Aux 12v 7 Output 1 Must be Enabled for 2 Wire Smoke Detectors Enable Smoke R Panel O P 1 Y To enable 2 Wire smoke detection on panel output 1 a jumper link must be fitted across the bottom two pins of JP10 The Area Option 2 Wire Smoke also needs to be enabled see page 61 NOTE 2 Wire smoke detectors can only be connected to panel output 1 Expander Auxiliary Input This input can be used for monitoring a remote power supply that has a voltage free output for the following three conditions AC Mains Fail Battery Fail 12V Fail and Tamper AMA Premier 8XP a Auxiliary Input Aux Input 1 AC Mains Fail 2k20 4 PSU Tamper 4 Normally Closed Contacts 1 AC Mains Fail 2 Battery Fail 3 12V Fail 4 PSU Tamper 2 Battery Fail 3 12V Fail When the Auxiliary Input is programmed as P
228. orarily plugged onto this connector to allow system programming and testing Functions dependent on Panel firmware version Set the keypad address switches to all on 2 Network Connection The and terminals provide power whilst the T and R terminals are transmit and receive data 3 For Future Use 4 Comm Port Connection Serial communications port for connecting the 8 XP W amp 32XP W toa SA PC Com USB Com or Com IP for use with Ricochet Monitor oftware 5 Lid Tamper When open puts the system into commission mode and digitally attenuates the receiver signal by 15Db 6 Programming LED s Allows programming of devices directly to the conjunction with the learn switch 7 Antenna RF Antenna Premier 32XP W 2 x Antenna Premier 8XP W 1 x Antenna 8 Network LED s Green LED Data received by the expander from the panel Red LED Data transmitted by the expander to the panel The flash rate depends on the mode and RF activity receiver in Ricochet V2 Expander Addressing Introduction 9 Heartbeat LED Flashes steadily to indicate that the receiver is functioning correctly If the light is ON or OFF all the time then there could be a hardware problem 10 Learn Switch To be used with programming LED s to learn devices directly to the receiver 11 Options Switch Use to select the receiver functionality depending on panel firmware Switch 1 ON firmware dependant please see the relevant programming se
229. ording to PD6662 2010 Disable PD6662 2010 The panel will operate according to the requirements of PD6662 2004 INS176 10 67 Global Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual System Options Go SEIT Global ions Ort System OFtions Use the YES key to move to the nextoption or use the SCROLL key to search Press NO to edit the volume level Enter a value or use the SCROLL key to increase or decrease the value e g 8 Full Volume Chime Volume Level E These options control various system functions 0 Advisory Volume Controls the volume of advisory tones entry exit etc from loudspeakers connected to the control panel Alarm tones are always full volume 1 min 8 max 1 Chime Volume Controls the volume level of Chime tones from ALL loudspeakers 1 min 8 max 2 No Of Re Arms Controls the number of times that a zone will re arm Once the re arm limit has been reached the zone is Locked Out and will not cause any further Intruder alarms 3 Anti code Resets Limits how many times a user can perform an Anti code reset Once this limit is been reached the system can only be reset using an Engineer code This counter is reset every month or whenever an Engineers code is entered 4 Multiple Knocks Controls how many times a zone with the Double Knock attribute must be activated before an alarm occurs The multiple knock count can be applied to zones
230. ork and the last device to cause an error is being displayed Het Errors A054 Z Last REP 1 Press RESET to clear the network errors Het Errors BGG Z Last REP 1 Yes This option allows the networks to be viewed to see what devices are connected and whether there are any problems Whenever new devices are added to the system the networks must be checked and confirmed ch If any devices are removed from the system the networks must be rechecked and reconfirmed An X on the display indicates that device that was previous fitted is no longer being seen by the control panel 118 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Engineer Utilities View RKP Status krie Ueiis t Endineer L View Evert ils Lod Use keys 1 8 to select a keypad and press 0 to toggle between networks e g 0 3 Network 2 Keypad 3 Press AREA to display errors Press NO to test output GRi Z1 H Z2 amP H d Press OMIT to testsounder This option allows the status of the keypad the zones and the output to be viewed View Exp Status Eet EnJineer Utils View Event Lod Engineer Utils View Exe Status Use keys 1 8 toselectan expander and press 0 to toggle between networks e g 0 2 Network 2 Expander 2 EE ke Zoe ARRAARAR Press AREA to change between zones volta ge outputs errors and PSU status if PSU200XP fitted Press CHIME to testzones P
231. ormation is not available Any device showing a level of 20 in commission mode should be investigated as the poor signal may affect system device performance one Hao Els BR S8 gt gt SfaxP NOTE f question marks appear it could be because either the system has just been powered up and information has not been collected yet or on large systems the information is not in memory To populate the display activate the device and the information should appear Device Messages Fone BEL The chosen zone does not have a Ricochet Hot Ricochet device learned to it Fone MAS PIR shows the last time the device communicated Ms9 7972 mins ado this represents the last message and could be a poll activation or tamper etc Zone A869 PIR This is a warning showing that the last sihr since msg communication from the device was over an hour ago This display shows that no message has been received yet this would normally be seen on a recently powered up system wait 15 minutes from power up before checking the diagnostics information one ANY EIR Ho med recud yet Signal Security one ANS Shock TP This display shows information relating to signal security on an 8XP W 4 windows are available to show information each window represents two devices Odd amp Even device slots Each window could show any of the information detailed in the table below No information is available The chosen de
232. ory Module Memory Module 24 48 88 168 only Nore Selecting memory module when none is fitted will prevent events being recorded to the log INS176 10 95 UDL 8 Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual DualCom Inside 48 Only Aerial Siting ALWAYS do a site survey to find an area of strong signal before installation Installing a Com GSM with a weak signal is bad installation practice The aerial should be mounted vertically at the point of strongest signal This is usually the highest point in the building often the loft area Avoid installing the aerial directly under metal roofs or within metal skinned buildings because this will reduce the signal strength and may inhibit operation completely If this is unavoidable the strongest signal will be found away from the metal roof or close to large external windows or skylights Avoid installing the aerial close 2 metres to cable runs ducting structural metalwork metal pipes water tanks and electronic equipment e g photocopiers fax machines etc These can have similar effects to metal roofs Reliable operation is unlikely with a low signal strength If the display shows that the signal strength is 40 or lower you should improve the signal strength This may be achieved by repositioning the aerial The GPRS aerial lead should not be cut therefore repositioning the aerial may require that the Com GSM is also repositioned The DualCom CS2
233. ounts 24 48 88 168 89 NOTE SE cocinan 133 eg aaa Notas Ze 134 UDE Optlons e ini kn kek ne iaa 91 Setup Modules E aaa Com Port Setup das DualCom Inside 48 Only oonconnnconnnnnnnonannnannnnannarenancnnnns 96 EMIZON 21 TCD ici nto 97 WebWayOne E 98 Chiron IRIS Zone Alarm Reporting Codes 02rrrrrrrererrearaaannanananannnnn 101 5 8 Setup Users Default User Codes Programming New USE PS scseseeesssseeeeseteeessneeeeeeees 109 Eet 109 User Functions and OPptiONS rrrerrrreerreserasasnasannasnnesonnn 110 User Options 1 User Options AAA rae e earannan seanar n User Coh EE User Time Lock User Name Text Door Control sssrinin nas iki pasan cap bi isoina ab pini aso sara DIR EE Deleting USOFS 00 00220rreeooorresononoanoonranononnenononoaononnanononouoonnnn Adding SmartKey 5 9 Engineer Utilities cesscceeseeeeeeees 113 View Event LOG ccccsccccsseeessneeesssneeessseeessneeesssneeessseeeens 113 Do Bell Test Do Walk Test 24 48 88 168 cs cceseeeessseeeessseeeeeseeee 116 Do Walk Test 640 cccccsseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeneeees View Zone Status cesiccissisisceocccccssevessvececessietesencsstacecsecsners Do System Tests Confirm DeviCes eee ki vites riveseoszsesansysoeessssyoonvnsossosasasesensyn View RKP Status cccccseceeseeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeee INS176 10 3 System Overview Premi
234. pander Outputs Expander outputs are for the outputs on the zone output expanders see page 23 for details and can be programmed to any of the output types listed Wire as per Panel Outputs shown on page 34 Custom Outputs Custom outputs are NOT physical outputs they are Software outputs that can be configured to operate under certain conditions see page 82 for details Once configured these outputs can then be assigned to a physical output see system outputs 22 27 X 10 Outputs X 10 outputs are NOT physical outputs they are Software outputs that can be configured to operate devices that are connected to an X 10 controller These outputs can also be assigned a house and unit number along with descriptive text see page 82 for details Programming Outputs When programming outputs select an output group and an output type from that group s list each output group has its own output types then select attributes if required DA Output Group Output Type Output Attributes Output Programmed Output Group Not Used Only the following output type is available Not Used off This output type never activates Output Group System Select an output type from the following options 00 ATS Path Fault This output type activates when a fault is detected with the Alarm Transmission System and deactivates when the fault is cleared 01 Mains Power Off This output type activates when no AC Mains is det
235. provide appropriate monitoring and charging for each External Sounders NOTE Texecom supply a range of external sounders INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation Installation Sequence Before attempting to install the alarm system read this section Once you have an overall understanding of the installation sequence carefully work through each step 1 Design the Layout Make a rough sketch of the premises to get an idea of where the alarm detection devices keypads zone expanders etc are to be located 2 Mounting the Panel The control panel should be mounted in a dry area close to an unswitched AC power source and the incoming telephone line if using a communicator Note You must complete all wiring before connecting the battery or applying AC mains to the control panel 3 Install the Keypads and Zone Expanders Mount and connect the keypads zone expanders and output modules to the control panel see page 20 for wiring details 4 Install the Alarm Detection Devices Install the detection devices PIR s Contacts PA Buttons etc and connect them to the control panel see page 31 for wiring details 5 Install the External Sounder Install the external sounder and connect to the control panel see page 33 for wiring details 6 Other Wiring Complete all other wiring including speakers telephone line and output connections etc see pages 33 34 for details 7 Applyin
236. ption These options control how various system functions work 00 No Bell Arm Fail If an area fails to arm an Internal alarm will occur and the Strobe output will activate Bell on Arm Fail If an area fails to arm an Internal alarm will occur and the Bell output will activate for 10 seconds Note The Strobe output will also activate for 5 seconds to indicate that the system has armed disarmed 01 Bell is an SAB The Bell output on the control panel applies OV when active Bell is an SCB The Bell output on the control panel removes OV when active 02 Clock is 24Hr The system time is displayed in the 24 Hour format Clock is 12Hr Default The system time is displayed in the 12 Hour format 03 Auto BST GMT The system clock will adjust itself at the beginning and the end of the summer the clock will automatically gain 1Hr on the last Sunday in March and lose 1Hr on the last Sunday in October Manual BST GMT The system clock will not adjust itself at the beginning and the end of the summer the clock will have to be adjusted manually 04 View Armed Areas When the system is part armed the areas that are armed are displayed and alarm information is displayed before a valid User code is entered Hide Armed Areas When the system is part armed the areas that are armed are not displayed and alarm information is only displayed after a valid User code has been entered 64
237. r code to the factory setting of A D Ga Note Loading the factory defaults can take up to 30 seconds to complete Loading defaults will only be possible if the NVM has not been locked see page 65 for details 21 Expansion The Expansion Port can be used for connecting a 60XiD Zone Expander see page 32 for details or an AV Module see page 40 for details X 10 Module or a Memory Module 22 Heartbeat LED Power Light Flashes steadily to indicate that the control panel is functioning correctly If the light is ON or OFF all the time then there could be a problem see page 42 for details 23 Current Reading Pads To calculate the current draw of the control panel measure the voltage across the two pads and multiply by 10 i e Reading 34mV x10 340mV 340mA 24 NVM 1 82 All system programming data and the event log is stored in one or two non volatile memory devices Fi F5 Protection Fuses 48 88 and 168 The following fuses are provided e F1 1Amp Auxiliary 12V Power fuse e 1 6 Amp Battery fuse electronic PTC o 1 Amp Network 1 fuse 1 Amp Bell Strobe fuse F2 F3 F4 F5 1 Amp Network 2 fuse 768 only INS176 10 15 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Premier Elite 640 PCB Layout sese e AR eet pr lt USE WITH TEXECOMPSU ONLY 100mV 1Amp don mit L E E KAI BAR CODE sE LN n EH Programming Port Oeooo fom
238. r 4k7 3k3 Fault Resistor 2k2 0 1k Zone Short 1k1 to 4k Zone Secure 4k1 to 5k6 Zone Fault 5k7 to 8k Zone Active 8k1 to 20k 30k Zone Mask 21k 30k Zone Tamper Outputs Outputs 1 amp 2 4XP Outputs 1 8 8XP 100mA switched to OV 100mA switched to OV Speaker Output 4XP amp 8XP Minimum load 8Q Keypad Type Environmental Operating Temperature 10 C 14 F to 55 C 131 F Storage Temperature 20 C 4 F to 60 C 140 F Maximum Humidity 95 non condensing EMC Environment Physical Residential Commercial Light Industrial Industrial Dimensions W x H x D 170mm x 140mm x 35mm LCD 32 Character LCD LCDL 32 Character large LCD LCDP LCD Prox Reader LCDLP LCDL Prox Reader Zones 2 EOL Resistor Values Alternatives Available EOL Resistor 2k2 3k3 Contact Resistor 4k7 3k3 Fault Resistor 2k2 0 1k Zone Short 1k1 to 4k Zone Secure 4k1 to 5k6 Zone Fault 5k7 to 8k Zone Active 8k1 to 20k 30k Zone Mask 21k 30k Zone Tamper Output 100mA switched to OV Back Lighting Fully adjustable Speaker Output LCDL LCDLP Minimum load 8Q Speaker Volume LCDL LCDLP Fully adjustable Proximity Reader LCDP LCDLP Tag Environmental Operating Temperature 10 C 14 F to 55 C 131 F Packed Weight 200g Approx Output Expanders Electrical Operating Voltage 9 13 7VDC
239. r Elite Series Installation Manual Installation 19 Ricochet Eng keypad connection not 12 W An engineer s keypad LCD keypad and interface lead can be temporarily plugged onto this connector to allow system programming and testing Set the keypad address switches to all ON 20 Ricochet Firmware Flash Port Connections for flasher interface to update Ricochet receiver firmware Factory use only 21 Commission Mode Jumper Fit when learning and placing devices remove once complete 22 Antenna RF antenna 23 RF LED s Left RED Transmit Middle GREEN Receive Right RED Wireless Network Tick 24 Plug on Communicator Connections This socket provides connection for COM300 COM2400 plug on communicators via the lead provided 25 Ricochet Comm Port Connection Serial communications port for connecting to a PC via PC Com USB Com or Com IP for use with Ricochet Monitor Software 26 Cover Tamper Provides tamper protection for the control panel 27 Heartbeat LED Power Light Flashes steadily to indicate that the control panel is functioning correctly If the light is ON or OFF all the time then there could be a problem 28 Cover Tamper Disable Disables the lid tamper 29 Flash Programming Port For upgrading the panel firmware 30 Battery Charge Selection Select 03A or 0 75A battery charging current 31 Current Reading Pads To calculate the current draw of the control panel measure the voltage ac
240. r accessed later on from a dedicated Ricochet Learn menu The new Menu can also be accessed from any top level menu by pressing the Comit key Learning Devices Learn Devices from first power up Follow the instructions given on page 42 or later for the first power sequence Providing the system has a Ricochet enabled expander installed the following will appear The flow diagram shows the procedure to learn devices WES to Select When all device slots have been used the following screen will be Learn Ricochet shown T DES gt y All Devices en En Gei The bottom line of text shows E ot 1 Learn Pe KEN the Zone number the Network Le rt ri a alla F S E and the Expander the device will be learned too P a 2 CKD Pressing the Meni key will return you to the Ricochet learn menu ower ue Devica The bottom line of text shows Geset i i E E e ies HEN pressing the Reset key will enter the Delete devices menu pie a the device sloton the expander CKD Learn Device to NI En ES e Je ke bei A ECH selec rentzones is only Zone 777 H7 E possible to selectZones which DD 1D BS Access the Learn Menu using the Omit Hot key From any top level engineering menu pressing the Cmit key will take you to the Ricochet learn menu above IMPORTANT In all cases when entering the Learn menu the next available free Zone will be chosen to learn a device
241. r and engineer codes can be 4 5 or 6 digits 38 Disable FOB PA When a Smartkey Transmitter FOB is being used with the alarm system the Panic Alarm PA function i e Pressing buttons 1 and 2 together is disabled Enable RF FOB PA When a Smartkey Transmitter FOB is being used with the alarm system the Panic Alarm PA function i e Pressing buttons 1 and 2 together is enabled 39 Armed Mask Fault If an Anti masking signal is detected when the system is armed the control panel will generate a Fault response Armed Mask Alarm If an Anti masking signal is detected when the system is armed the control panel will generate an Alarm response 40 Silent RF FOB PA PA alarms generated from a wireless FOB will cause a silent alarm Audible FOB PA PA alarms generated from a wireless FOB will cause a Audible alarm 41 Monitor PSU Battery Battery faults from the PSU200XP are monitored No PSU Batt Fits Battery faults from the PSU200XP are not monitored 42 Exp Loss Tamp An expander lost event will generate a tamper alarm No Exp Loss Tamp An expander lost event will generate a fault condition 43 Soak Test Warn If zones have been placed on Soak Test a warning will be shown to the user at the time of arming No Soak Test Warn If zones have been placed on Soak Test no warning will be shown to the user at the time of arming 66 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Global Opt
242. rG Ricochet Shows the Panic function has been activated Panic Bat OK VES to erase Use this option ONLY if the panel has been unknown kesfobs replaced and not all Premier Elite SmartKey are recognised by the new panel or if the error tone is heard when learning new Premier Elite SmartKey NOTE This option DOES NOT remove known Premier Elite SmartKey use the Delete option in Setup Users INS176 10 123 Engineer Utilities Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Ricochet Diagnostics Menu YES to Selecti Engineer Utils Engineer Utils View Event Lod Use to scroll to Ricochet Diag Zone BEL Hot Ricochet YES to erase unknown kesfobs Enter the Zone User Number to view zone HBS Shock le one BBS Shock R S PR S TIK lisertGf Ricochet ARPA zane HAJ Status Shock aaa5POtt lisertGf Ricochet Lodor at OF zone BBS Shock APR zone HAJ Shock Slhr since ns 124 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Programming Part Arms Alter Part Arms YES to Selecti Zone Setur YES to Selecti Alter Part Arms For Part Arm 1 one BB is gt OH Chime d y Press OMIT to select Part Arm 1 Press CHIME to select Part Arm 2 Press PART to select Part Arm 3 e g CHIME PartArm 2 For Part Arm 2 Zone AB is gt
243. rammed to lockout the keypad see page 65 for details the keypad will lock out for the duration of this timer 29 Eng log off Dly This timer starts when an Engineers code is entered When the timer expires the engineer is automatically logged out of engineer s mode This timer is suspended if there are tamper faults on the system allowing the engineer to remain in engineer s mode indefinitely whilst on site 30 Fire Bell Delay This timer starts when a fire alarm is generated in a particular area When the timer expires sounders are activated in ALL areas 31 Forced Entry Dly When a zone with the Guard attribute see page 52 for details activates this timer is started For the duration of this timer any Entry Exit 1 or 2 zone with the Entry Exit 2 attribute see page 52 for details will become a Guard zone When this timer expires the Entry Exit 1 or 2 zone will revert back to its normal mode of operation 32 Supervision Time This timer controls the frequency at which the RadioPLUS detectors are required to report in to the control panel 33 Poll IP Every This timer controls the frequency that the ComiP Polls the ARC System Config Ces Global Ortions System Timers Global OFtions System Config Confiduration AA de Bet Set Pail Enter a configuration number or use the SCROLL key to search e g 09 NVM Unlocked Press NO to change the config o
244. rced walk test Zones without this attribute will respond as normal R RESET Zones with this attribute will not be monitored during the Detector Reset period i e when the exit mode is started and power is removed from certain detectors to reset them the Fault on the zone is ignored Zones without this attribute will be monitored as normal A AUTO RE ARM Zones with this attribute will only re arm at the end of the bell duration providing that the Re arm limit has not been reached see page 68 for details Once this limit has been reached the zone will lock out and not cause any further Intruder alarms Zones without this attribute will always re arm at the end of the bell duration Q QUICK RESPONSE The response time of the zones with this attribute is governed by the Zone Loop response Timer see page 63 for details The response time of a zone without this attribute is fixed at 250mS E ENGINEER ALARM Zones with this attribute will cause an Intruder alarm when activated if the engineer arms the system area Zones without this attribute will not cause an Intruder alarm when activated if the engineer arms the system area 52 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Zone Setup Attributes for Moment or Latch Keys Select attributes by pressing keys 1 to 8 a letter on the display means the attribute is selected a Dot on the display means the attribute is not
245. remier Elite Series Installation Manual Suite Arm Modes Enn res amming Area Programming Timers gt Use the SCROLL key to selecta suite Use keys 1 5 to select an arming mode e g 1 Entry E xit Suite Z ie imed exi VE HEET The way that an Area Arm Suite arms when selected can be configured for any of the following options 1 Entry Exit The suite will arm after the Entry Exit door has been closed and the Exit Settle timer has expired 2 Exit Term The suite will arm after the Entry Exit door has been closed the Exit Terminator button has been pressed and the Exit Settle timer has expired 3 Timed Exit Default for All Areas The suite will arm after the programmed Exit Time has expired Note f an Exit Terminator zone is activated at any point during the exit mode any remaining exit time is cancelled and the area will arm immediately 4 Instant The suite will arm instantly 5 Deferred The suite will arm after the programmed Exit Time has expired However if any zones not on the exit route are activated during the exit mode the Exit Time is restarted Area Options 24 48 88 168 Area BEE ien rea Area Programnmina Timers Area Programmina Area OFLions Use the SCROLL key to select an area option Press NO to change the area option e Arr alah J b EEN
246. report open disarm and close arm events to an Alarm Receiving Centre every time they arm or disarm User Config This menu will only be displayed if a Custom User type is selected AND User Menu User Option U is enabled see page 111 for details This menu defines which menu options are available to the user when their code is entered Press CS to scroll through the options and press to select them or use keys a Letter option IS selected Star option is NOT selected The following options are available C Change Code The selected user can change their own User code Z Chime Zones The selected user can access the Edit Chime Zones option allowing them to select which zones chime when activated T Change Timers The selected user can access the Override Timers Alter Timers Alter Part Arms Alter Hol Dates and Edit Phone No menu options S System Tests The selected user can access the System Tests option allowing them to walk test zones activate the external sounder etc U Setup Users The selected user can access the Setup Users option allowing them to alter existing users or assign new users However users cannot assign User types to the system that have a higher access level than themselves Also if a user assigns a Custom User type functions that are not available to them cannot be assigned to the Custom user E Eng A
247. ress OMIT to test sounder Press 1 8 to test outputs If PSU 200 XP Fitted HE EZ 12345678 UE ES tare ete ai etale This option allows the status of the expander the zones voltage inputs and outputs and any monitored power supply to be viewed Note The PSU status shows the following codes A AC Mains Fail 1 Battery 1 Fault 2 Battery 2 Fault F Mains Fuse Blown T PSU Box Tamper Set System Time Engineer Ubi l Endineer Utils View Event Lod Use keys 0 9 to enter the lt 4 new time 24 Hour format e g 1645 4 45 pm Ente time gt CC The control panel has a real time clock that is used to date and time stamp events that are recorded within the system log The option allows you to set the control panel time Set System Date s EnJinser Ut View Event ils Lod Engineer Utils Set System Date Use keys 0 9 to enter the new date DD MM YY e g 030501 3rd May 2001 EZ The control panel has a real time clock that is used to date and time stamp events that are recorded within the system log The option allows you to set the control panel date INS176 10 119 Engineer Utilities Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Change Eng Code EEN Endineer Utils View Evert Lod Enter User code number CO JE 4 5 or6digits long e g 1234 1234 Cres LJ This option allows the Engineer code User 00 to be c
248. riority Alarm Alarm Restore Restore Omit Omit Reinstate Reinstate Omit Reinstate 102 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL amp Digi Options Non Zone Event Types The default Non Zone Event codes are as follows No Type Event Reporting Group Contact ID SIA ID 22 Keypad Medical Alarm Priority Alarm 100 MA Keypad No Restore Restore 100 MH Keypad No 23 Keypad Fire Alarm Priority Alarm 115 FA Keypad No Restore Restore 115 FH Keypad No 24 Keypad Audible PA Alarm Priority Alarm 120 PA Keypad No Restore Restore 120 PH Keypad No 25 Keypad Silent PA Alarm Priority Alarm 122 PA Keypad No Restore Restore 122 PH Keypad No 26 Duress Code Alarm Alarm Priority Alarm 121 HA User No Restore Restore 122 HH User No 27 Alarm Active Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 28 Bell Active Alarm Not Reported Restore Not Reported 29 Zones Locked Out Alarm Alarm 130 BA Zone No Restore Not Reported 30 Verified Cross Zone Alarm Alarm Alarm 130 BV 00 Restore Not Reported 2 S 31 User Code Alarm Not Reported User No Restore Not Reported 32 Exit Started Alarm Not Reported Keypad No Restore Not Reported 33 Exit Error Arming Failed Alarm Open Close 457 EE 00 Restore Not Reported 34 Entry Started Alarm Not Reported Restore Not
249. ross the two pads and multiply by 10 e Reading 34mV x10 340mV 340mA 32 Battery Kick start Button When powering up the panel without AC Mains present this button must be pressed in order to connect the battery If AC Mains is present this button does not need to be pressed 33 Power Supply Connection Only for use with the Texecom PSU DO NOT CONNECT ANY OTHER MAINS SUPPLY TO THESE TERMINALS PTC Protection Fuses The following fuses are provided F6 PTC 0 9A Auxiliary 12V Power fuse F4 PTC 0 9 A Network 1 fuse F5 PTC 0 9 A Bell Strobe fuse INS176 10 13 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Premier Elite 48 88 168 PCB Layout f d E E Port MO ET A vb Es Y ONLY m 45 BE al UO ANA E z CH uM Dr e l o 22 OP4 A2 3 R R e e EA OP3 DC 47 e e a is e a WW cr e pl EB a Be D 2 eae BAR CODE Ad D i 12v n i F3 F5 F1 a O m an DES e ESCH 100mV 1Am Strb O Leem an A vg e en E ones A E E CA ek SS KLS EH 5 L i l Ni l l Ni 2 O AIR 2 Aux 12v S Zone H S Zone 5 S Zone S S Zone A Zone 5 ki Zone a S Zone gt Zone m O 1 Texecom PSU Connection Connected to the Texecom Switch Mode Power Supply DO NOT CONNECT THE MAINS SUPPLY TO THE
250. rs 24 Hrs Current Battery Charge Selector Time n Current Consumption 125mA 30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC otherwise 60h MaxinitimiGuUrrentAva lable This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC 0 79A charg PROA Jumper Settings Rated Output Battery Recharge SN N Battery Battery Rated Output Amps Arrangement Time attery Charge Selector RE KE en ern Lx ZAN DATE 03A 1x17 0 75 1 04 0 558A 0 4164 0 133 lt 24Hrs 0 75A e 1x17Ah Se SS Standby and Recharge Times EN50131 1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 y d Minimum Standby 12h 12h 30h Premier Elite 24 Polymer Period Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs Current Time J Current Consumption __ 95MA_ PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 AMA Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 0 3A charge 1 1A Maximum Recharge 72 Hrs 72 Hrs 24 Hrs Time Rated Output Battery Battery Rated Output Amps Arrangement Charge 12h This time may be halved if mains failure is signalled to an ARC 1x 7Ah 0 3A 0 48A EN50131 1 Grade 1 Grade 2 Current Minimum Standby Period 12h 12h Current Consumption 150mA Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs Maximum Current Available PD6662 Grade 1 Grade 2 0 3A charge 1 0A Standby Period 12 Hrs 12 Hrs Maximum Recharge Time 72 Hrs 72 Hrs Rated Output 30h if MAINS FAIL is reported to ARC otherwise 60h
251. rt the Entry 2 Delay timer for the selected area Note any Entry Exit zone remains active at the end of the entry time it will automatically be omitted until the system has been unset and re set If an Entry Exit zone type is locked out Guard Access zones in the same area as the omitted Entry Exit zone will automatically become Entry Exit 1 zones to allow access into the premises without causing an alarm If an Entry Exit 1 or 2 zone type is assigned the Entry Exit 2 attribute see page 52 when a zone with the Guard attribute activates and causes an alarm when the area is fully armed the zone will become a Guard zone for the duration of the Abort timer 3 Guard Normally used for detection devices such as PIR s Door Contacts etc This zone type will cause an Intruder alarm if it is activated when the system area is armed This zone type will also activate any output programmed as Guard Alarm 4 Guard Access Normally used for detection devices along the entry exit route This zone type will allow the user to walk past the detector without causing a Fault during the exit mode or an Intruder alarm during the entry mode however the zone will cause an immediate Intruder alarm if activated at any other time This zone type will also start the entry mode when the system area is part armed and activate any output programmed as Guard Access Alarm 5 24Hr Audible This z
252. s PSU Monitor control panel has detected a 12V Output failure 114 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Engineer Utilities Log Event Description PSUTam Alarm An expander input programmed as PSU Monitor control panel has detected a Tamper condition QUICK Armed Quick Arm from keypad R Bat Alarm The Wireless receiver has detected a low battery signal from device Radio Jamming The Wireless receiver has detected an attempt to jam its radio signal RADIO PAD LOST The Radio Pad has no signal or has lost communications with the control panel REARM LOCK Zone has locked out after reaching its re arm limit after causing an alarm RECENT Armed Area has been armed recently Redcare Line Fault The Redcare has detected a line fault REMOTE Armed Area was armed using the Wintex UDL software REMOTE Disarmed Area was disarmed using the Wintex UDL software Remote PC Reset A reset has been performed by the remote download PC Remote Reset A reset has been performed using the Remote Reset input Redcare Reset A reset has been performed by the Redcare RF Device Low Battery RF Device has registered a low battery condition RKP MEDICAL A Medical alarm 7 amp 9 has occurred from keypad number RKP FIRE A Fire alarm 4 amp 6 has occurred from keypad number RKP AUD PA An Audible PA alarm 1 8 3 has occurred from keypad num
253. s allow multiple zones to be assigned to a Zone Group Output Once assigned triggering any of the zones assigned to the group will trigger the output The default option for each Zone is 0 and means the Zone is not assigned to any group Please see page 83 for the programming options for the Zone Group Output Type Output Groups DD 243 To comply with DD 243 during the normal entry delay the control panel must prevent a Confirmed Intruder Alarm from being reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre WARNING Owing to the ability to disable ALL of the confirmation facilities the customer should be advised in writing by the alarm company that ALL means of alarm confirmation are disabled when the initial entry door is opened The alarm company should then obtain written acceptance from the customer of the disabling of the means of alarm confirmation 54 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Area Programming Timers Brea PraSrsnning Area Programming Timers A Exit Delas DAD Secondisi Use the SCROLL key to select an area For 640 see below E gt Exit Delas HAD Secondisi BBB Seconds Press YES to move to the required timer group or press RESET to move backwards e g YES Enter a newtimer value e g 025 25 Seconds i Es ra 1 Delay Aza okha LI Yes Use the SCROLL key 1A Exit Delay to select areas between B28 Secondis
254. s in INS176 to install the equipment and initiate the power up sequence When applying power for the first time the factory default settings must be loaded DualCom Inside cannot be setup through Wintex so please follow the diagrams and instructions to setup DualCom Inside The process for enabling DualCom Inside is as follows 1 Install Equipment 2 Plug Com2400 onto control panel PCB 3 Plug Com GSM onto Com port 1 a Set option switches 1 8 2 to ON and 3 4 4 to OFF Enter engineers mode on keypad Select UDL Digi Options 4 5 6 Com Port Setup 7 Select Com2400 as the Digicom 8 Select ComIP for Com port 1 9 Enable DualCom Inside 10 Choose your ARC 11 Enter your Gemini Account number 12 Enter your PSTN number 13 Test the equipment The flow diagram on the following page shows the procedure to enable and test DualCom Inside DualCom Inside Auto Set Ur Enabled Ha y Do not use Auto Setup until Signal Strength shows YES to Selecti UBL Di9i Options UBL Di3i Options Signal Strength CSQ is gt 40 amp BER is 0 Reset Digi CSpz dp BERIO if the values are incorrect reposition the antenna UDL Di9i SIM ICCID F Com Por KEE O Drboar Hothin icom ule Com Por ComIP M UDL Di3i Options DualCom Inside ARC ist County Mon Usethec key to selectyour ARC Ifthe ARC you use is not listed go to User Code and enterthe code you have been given Ge
255. s slots on the network Premier Elite 8XP W take one address To enable all of the advanced functionality and diagnostics capability V2 the following are minimum requirements Wintex Version 6 2 or later Ricochet Monitor 0 2 18 or later Premier Elite Series V2 xx or later Premier Elite 32XP W 8 8 W Expanders V2 xx or later System Design Considerations To ensure correct setup and operation of the Wireless Network it is important that the following procedures are used when learning and placing devices Multiple Expander Systems When using multiple expanders great care should be taken when designing the system Each expander should be treated as its own wireless network it is not possible for devices to hop from one wireless network to the other it is also not possible for expanders to pass wireless signals from devices not assigned to them and nor can the expanders talk to each other Learning Devices All devices should be learnt before they are placed in their final location The expander should be in commission mode please see INS467 for details This will ensure that they are registered on the receiver or control panel and that Mesh Networks and routing are established correctly Please refer to the relevant section in this document to Learn Devices to the system Learning Premier Elite SmartKey On V2 systems Premier Elite SmartKey should only be learned AFTER all devices and expanders are in their final
256. se hotkeys 1 8 to select a zone type or use the Press NO to edit SCROLL key to search the zone type e g 3 Guard y Zone 604 Panel 4 Zone 84 Panel 4 Zone 664 Panel 4 Entra Esit 1 CNO gt EntrarExit 1 lt Guard lt A Yes Ge Press NO to Use keys 1 8 to select Press NO to edit the zone an attribute or use the select deselect attributes 1 SCROLL key to search the attribute y ARE ek BPE kone a a ae a L FETE ak f k ak O ENTEVE Se a A lt gt 4 Yes Q gt Press NO to Use keys 1 8 to select Press NO to editthe zone an attribute or use the select deselect attributes 2 SCROLL key to search the attribute y Zone 604 Attribz DOUBLE KUCK AUTO RE ARM AUTO RE ARM zk kk kk E E E oR E cK GR GE kt zk kk i E E ok kk kA k ok A Ce 4 DD Ces Press NO on Use keys 1 8 to selectan area e g 2 B Use the em GEE AREA key to toggle between areas Ato Handl P kf gt i For Premier 640 see below i Vv 1 Zone DD Areas Zone DDd Areas Zone 604 Areas Eksasasna No gt Akk gt ABS 1 A LI Ces mi 1 Use keys 0 9 to program Yes y prog Ces Press NO to text the same way thata edit the mobile phone works zone text e g 7 444 777 PIR y LI Zone d Text PIR i A 1 Ge Li LI Ces Press NO to Change hep 2 2 2 2 2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L Vo Chime type A v 4 Toora A Se 8 i Zone Bl Areasi Crea po Use the key to switch Ge Chime Ge an Chime 1 ana between Area Groups 1 2 3 4 silent ime I A
257. selected The following attributes are only available for Moment Key or Latch Key zone types l INSTANT ARM When using a key switch the area will arm instantly P PART ARMING When using a key switch the area will Part arm F FULL ARM DISABLE When using a key switch to Full arm an area the key switch is disabled once the area is armed D DISARM ONLY The key switch cannot be used for Arming it can only be used for Disarming F SILENTARMING When arming using a key switch the selected areas will arm silently T TIME ARM DISABLE Activation of the key switch will override the Time Arming feature on the control panel and prevent it from operating until the zone is reinstated K KEY TUBE A key switch zone type with this attribute will log when the zone is activated and also when the zone is restored Attributes for Custom Zones Select attributes by pressing keys 1 to 8 a letter on the display means the attribute is selected a Dot on the display means the attribute is not selected The following attributes are only available for Custom zone types L INTERNAL Activation of this zone when armed will cause the internal sounders to activate B BELL STROBE Activation of this zone when armed will cause the external sounder strobe to activate M MONITOR 24Hr The zone is armed at all times C ENABLE COMS Activation of this zone when armed w
258. sential for the code to function correctly and items 5 6 7 8 and 9 which are optional 1 User Number When users are assigned to the system they need to be identified by the control panel Each user is identified as Users 01 02 03 etc User 01 is always the Master User 2 User Code This is a unique 4 5 or 6 digit code number that is assigned to a user The system will allow a mixture of different length User codes The User code must be entered at a keypad to operate the alarm system Notre There is a programmable Black List of banned user codes which can be set and edited via Wintex UDL software 3 User Areas Any number of areas can be assigned to the selected user Assigning areas to a user determines which areas can be armed disarmed reset etc by that user In addition assigning areas to a user determines which of the area related functions i e omitting zones silent arming etc will be available to that user 4 User Types The User type determines which functions are available to the user i e arming disarming resetting etc In addition the User type also determines which options the user can access i e Setup Users System Tests etc 5 User Time Lock This option allows the selected user to be denied access to the system at different times of the day and days of the week When a Control Timer is assigned to a user the User code will not allow access to any functions during the timers On period
259. sible to use both GSM and GPRS IP Only functionality at the same time 36 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation SIM Card Types SIM cards are split into two types e Dynamic IP SIM cards the everyday kind of SIM card used in mobile phones GSM units that use this kind of SIM card can access any data on the internet but cannot be contacted from the internet This type of SIM card should be used for SMS text messaging a Upload Download via GSM A data number will be required to uses Upload Download e Fixed IP SIM cards specialist SIM cards that have a fixed internet public IP address which means that in addition to being able to access any data on the internet they can be contacted from the internet For Premier Elite ComGSM this means they can be used for both alarm reporting and upload download via IP GPRS If a data number is also available it is possible to use upload download via the data number GSM instead of the IP address SIM cards can have two different phone numbers e Voice Number used for voice calls and SMS D Data Number used for GSM data calls Upload Download Either of these facilities can be enabled disabled by the operator Note Care should be taken when using Pay as you go SIM cards make sure you have the ability to Top Up Pay as You Go SIM cards generally DO NOT have data numbers please check with your service provider SIM cards purchase Te
260. sing the relevant keypad option in the Keypad Setup menu see page 74 for details 22 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation 8XP W 8 32XP W V2 xx gt Ricochet V2 xx This new technology adds additional features and functions for Ricochet enabled security systems The Expanders used must be Premier Elite XP W V2 xx Note DO NOT mix V1 amp V2 expanders on the same Premier Elite panel Multiple Expander Support It is now possible to add multiple expanders to the system allowing for greater flexibility in system design and also taking wireless capability to new levels Additional device modes and diagnostics functions also give more information about the system status and allow greater control over devices modes of operation Control Panel Capacity The table below details the maximum number of expanders devices and Premier Elite SmartKey that may be used on the different control panels other configurations may be possible by mixing Premier Elite 32XP W amp Premier Elite 8XP W 32XP W 8XP W a a D n kaj m Panel DI 8 PremierElite Y 8 Premier Elite S e SmartKey S 3 SmartKey x a x a Premier Elite 1 16 16 2 16 25 24 P ie o 1 32 16 4 32 50 Premier Elite e A 8 16 N A N A N A R Go a 2 64 32 8 64 100 Premier a 428 64 16 128 200 168 a oe 16 512 256 16 128 256 NOTE Premier Elite 32XP W take 4 addres
261. snon 57 Auxiliary Fault Comme ctions 2 cccssccceeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeees 33 Area Suite Text Speaker COMNecti0MS ooonnniccicninncancnancnan cnc carr nana r rro nana 33 Suite Arm Modes External Sounder Connections 33 Area Options 24 48 88 168 EE 58 Panel Outputs cinc 34 Area Options 40 58 Digicom Outputs 1 8 0 0rrrerrreeroorooreosooosenoooooooonoosononnonnnn 34 Time Arm Area 2 Wire Smoke Detector EE 35 Area a asa AAA E wo 5 3 Global Options 2 css sccsesseseesseseeeeeeenneeeeees 63 Plug on COMMUNICAROES ooocooncnnncnnnnnonnnncannnannnnanencnnnnnnennn 36 o A A e kat babe 36 Seng Si SIM Card TYPES con 37 System Config 00a0rarroerooorooorooooosonoooooonosooooooonoounounosoaonoonnn 64 Premier Elite ComGSM Layout 37 System Options ooononcnncnonnnnnninncnn carac rro nara rn nana 68 TEE WE 38 EE kis INSTANATAON cion airis 38 Control Timers a Panel Comfigursgien 38 System TeXt AAA Using the SMS Control Commands AMO AAA 70 What will be sent in the Text Message ns 39 Holiday DAtES oooocooncccconocccononncnnanancnnnancnnnanc adenan sapne nana nnas 71 MO EE 40 Speaker Tones att COMIP Module ocio ias 40 PC Oup t Toxt eran cement ena te Commissioning A Custom O P TeXt ccsccccesecsseeesesenesneesseeeestersneeserenners 72 USB COM ici i 41 5 4 Keypad Setup ern 73 e A ko T 41 Keypad RE 74 PRINT COM scccccseecssceesceseessnesseeseeseneseeseeesaessnvsnessnesevantnes 41 Keyp
262. ss to exit from the message the display will then return to normal When alarm information is being displayed pressing the SCROLL key will slow down the display and also allow manual scrolling through the events Fault Warning Tones When a fault condition occurs i e mains fail line fault etc the internal sounders will chime every 30 seconds for 3 minutes The chiming will automatically stop when a valid User code is entered when is pressed or after 3 minutes whichever occurs first The fault indication will only be cleared from the display when the fault has been rectified i e power telephone line has been restored Fault Messages SYSTEM ALERTS There are system faults waiting to be Tue 86 Mar 2885 viewed enter a valid user code to view the faults After entering a code faults will be displayed for 30 seconds If the fault is not reset within 30 seconds this message will be displayed again The number of devices connected to the networks has changed from the last time a Confirm Devices was done Confirm Devices Tue 86 Mar 2661 You need a user Engineer access is programmed for to enable access Engineer code User code see page 65 for details The Engineers code was entered when the system was fully armed access to the programming menu can only be gained when the system is not fully armed You need a user Lo unarm sustem The alarm engineer has logged into the programming menu and is work
263. ssible to select Zones which have devices learned Gres O Gen KEY Pressing the key will return you to the Ricochet learn menu pressing the key will enter the Learn devices menu 50 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Zone Setup Zone Types Each zone must be programmed before it is recognised by the system Zone numbers are entered as a three digit number i e Zone 1 would be entered as 001 Each zone consists of a zone type attributes areas and zone text When programming zones first select a zone type then select any required attributes assign the zone to an area and then program any required zone text Zone Type Zone Attributes Zone Areas Zone Text Zone Programmed The following zone types are available 0 Not used A zone that is not monitored by the system unused zones should be programmed as Not Used or linked out 1 Entry Exit 1 Normally used for the main entry exit door i e Front Door The zone can be activated during the exit mode without causing a Fault Once the system area is armed activation of the zone will start the Entry 1 Delay timer for the selected area 2 Entry Exit 2 Normally used for another entry exit door that requires a different entry delay i e Back Door Garage Door etc The zone can be activated during the exit mode without causing a Fault Once the system area is armed activation of the zone will sta
264. ssing Each Expander must be assigned a different address using the DIL switches located in the centre of the PCB The table below shows the expander addressing Address 1 ox Note Never set two expanders on the same network to the same address 24 48 88 168 640 48 88 168 640 only 88 168 amp 640 only Expander Zones The expander has eight programmable zones see page 31 for wiring details Each zone is also fully programmable see page 48 for details INS176 10 25 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Star and Daisy Jumper Option The PCB has a jumper JP3 which allows you to select either STAR S or DAISY D wiring configuration The jumper should be set as follows DD If the network IN connection is wired in parallel with any other device the jumper MUST be set to the S position All previous STAR versions of the expander operated in this mode and for backward compatibility the unit is supplied with the jumper in this position D S If the network IN connection is only wired to one device the jumper should be set to the D position When the jumper is set to the STAR position the network data signals are not boosted between expander and the previous device In this mode the network cabling MUST not exceed 100m between devices When the jumper is set to the DAISY position the network dat
265. ster User code is Gn gt e Check that the User code you are using is not Time Locked if the User code is time locked then the access code will only be accepted when Control Timer 1 is off see pages 69 and 111 for details Keypad zones do not operate e Each keypad zone has to be mapped onto the system before it can be used see page 74 for details e The zone is not programmed see page 48 for details Keypad emergency keys do not operate e Each keypad can be configured so that the emergency keys PA FIRE and MEDICAL can be enabled or disabled Check that the keypad has been programmed correctly see page 74 for details 42 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Commissioning and Troubleshooting Expander Expander does not operate at all e Check that the expander is wired correctly from the control panel see page 20 for wiring details e Check the network fuses F3 and F5 and replace if blown NOTE Only on 48 88 168 System does not recognise zones e f the expander is on a long cable run check the voltage between the and terminals at the expander and ensure that it measures no less than 10 0V The speaker output does not work e The expander can be configured so that Alarm Entry Exit Chime tones etc can be enabled or disabled Check that the expander has been programmed correctly see page 76 for details e The speaker volume on the expander is electronically adjusta
266. store Restore Omit Omit Reinstate Reinstate Omit Reinstate INS176 10 101 UDL 8 Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Zone Type Event Reporting Group Contact ID Auxiliary Alarm Alarm Tamper 150 Alarm Restore Restore 150 Omit Omit Reinstate 572 24Hr Tamper Alarm Reinstate Alarm Restore Omit Reinstate Restore Omit Omit Reinstate Exit Terminator Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Open Close Alarm Restore Open Close Omit Omit Reinstate Keyswitch Momentary Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Open Close Alarm Restore Omit Open Close Omit Reinstate Keyswitch Latching Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Open Close Alarm Restore Open Close Omit Omit Reinstate Security Key Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Open Close Alarm Restore Open Close Omit Omit Reinstate Omit Key Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Omit Reinstate Alarm Restore Omit Reinstate Omit Omit Reinstate Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Omit Reinstate Alarm Restore Omit Reinstate Omit Omit Reinstate Reinstate Omit Reinstate Confirmed PA Audible Alarm Priority Alarm Alarm Restore Restore Omit Omit Reinstate Confirmed PA Silent Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate P
267. t Modules 24 1 48 amp 48 W Up to 2 88 Up to 4 168 Up to 8 640 Up to 32 Zones 24 8 expandable to 24 48 8 expandable to 48 48 W 4 expandable to 48 88 8 expandable to 88 168 8 expandable to 168 640 0 expandable to 640 EOL Resistor Values Alternatives Available EOL Resistor 2k2 3k3 Contact Resistor 4k7 3k3 Fault Resistor 2k2 O 1k Zone Short 1k1 to 4k Zone Secure 4k1 to 5k6 Zone Fault 5k7 to 8k Zone Active 8k1 to 20k 30k Zone Mask 21k 30k Zone Tamper Digicom Outputs Outputs 1 to 8 100mA switched to OV Panel Outputs PG1 24 only 100mA ve Outputs 1 amp 2 48 88 168 500mA switched to OV Outputs 3 amp 4 88 168 500mA switched to 12V Premier Elite 640 25LC10241 P 130 INS176 10 Specifications Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Remote Keypads any combination of the two Electrical Operating Voltage 10 13 7VDC ACE Type B Current Consumption without Prox Quiescent Not Backlit 25mA Alarm Not Backlit 45mA Fully Backlit 100mA Alarm Fully Backli 145mA Current Consumption with Prox Quiescent Not Backlit 85mA Alarm Not Backlit 105mA Fully Backlit 185mA Alarm Fully Backli 205mA Data Network 4 wire standard 7 0 2 alarm cable up to 500m Star Daisy Chain or any combination of the two Zones 8XP 8 DP or EOL zones 60IXD 60 iD zones 2 loops EOL Resistor Values Alternatives Available EOL Resistor 2k2 3k3 Contact Resisto
268. tab downwards Insert the SIM card into the holder with the chamfered corner to the top left Push the holder back into position and lock the SIM by sliding the locking tab upwards Note The SIM card must be inserted before connecting the Premier Elite ComGSM module to the contro panel and must not be removed until after the power supply to the Premier Elite ComGSM module has been deactivated 5 Set the option switches as required see page 37 6 Now connect the harness lead onto the control panel communication port COM 1 or 2 The module should now be powered and the heartbeat LED G should be flashing Note You should check and confirm that the signal strength is still the same as recorded during the site survey Panel Configuration Text Messaging and Upload Download via GSM GSM Mode panel port programmed as GSM Module Dynamic IP SIM card 1 Enter Engineers Programming mode and select UDL Digi Options then select Com Port Setup Ensure Com Port is programmed as GSM Module 2 Now select the Digi Options menu and make sure that Digi Option 1 is programmed for Digi is Enabled 3 Now select Program Digi and ensure the following options are programmed for one of the ARC options a Protocol SMS Messaging b Primary No The number of the recipient s mobile telephone c Secondary No Secondary mobile telephone number if required d Account No Leave bla
269. te this output 62 Speaker Mimic This output type activates whenever the internal speaker output is on and deactivates when the speaker output is off 63 Full Armed Exit This output type activates when the selected area is in the full arm exit mode and then arms and deactivates when the area is disarmed 64 Detector Fault This output type activates when a detector fault occurs and deactivates when the fault is reset 65 Detector Masked This output type activates when a detector mask occurs and deactivates when the mask is reset 66 Fault Present This output type activates when a general fault occurs i e Line Fault AC Mains Fail Detector Fault etc and deactivates when the fault is cleared 67 LED Control This output type is always activate and deactivates when a User or Engineers code is entered to gain access to a menu The output activates again 30 seconds after the user engineer exits the menu This output type is for use with detectors that require OV applied to disable their LED s 68 Full Arm Entry This output type activates when the entry mode is started and deactivates when the entry mode finishes whenever the system in Full Armed 69 Fire Sounder This output type activates when a Zone programmed as Fire or a Keypad Fire 4 amp 6 causes a Fire Alarm in the selected area and deactivates when the alarm is reset INS176 10 81 System Outputs Premier Elite Series Installation Ma
270. temporarily disabled zone and tamper to allow the zone to be worked on or made to chime every time it is activated Note When leaving the View Zone Status menu all zones will be automatically reinstated and cleared of Chime INS176 10 117 Engineer Utilities Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Do System Tests Engineer Oi Ts Engineer Utils View Event Lod Engineer Utils System Tests CECR us Use keys 1 4 to select an option or use the SCROLL key to search e g YES View Sys Status S E Creat erh This option allows various control panel features to be tested or reviewed 1 View Sys Status Allows the system voltage and current to be viewed 2 View Batt Status Allows the battery voltage and charging status to be viewed 3 Test Outputs Allows the Bell Speaker and system outputs to be tested 4 View Version No This option allows the control panel software version and serial number to be viewed Confirm Devices EnSineer Ei T Use the S CROLL key to select the required network Press YES if the number of devices fitted is correct An X on the display indicates thata device was previous fitted AE Z Bee adain a Confirm Press YES to confirm the devices fitted a confirmation tone will be heard Het EEP 123 z ExP l Press AREA to view the network errors the total number of errors on the netw
271. teristics for the outputs are shown below Bank Outputs Max Current Type 1 1to 8 100mA Switched ve 2 1to8 100mA Switched ve Tamper Output The tamper switch on the output module is connected to the tamper output at the top of the module If monitoring of the lid tamper is required this output must be connected to a suitable input on the control panel or zone expander RM8 Relay Module The Premier Elite RM8 Relay Module is compatible with any control panels that have a plug on RedCARE Dualcom footprint Features e 8relay outputs 12V 3Amp each e 8 Auxiliary inputs ve applied e Auxiliary 12V output protected by a 1 Amp fuse e Relay ON indication via LED s Auxiliary Inputs 1 8 ve applied RLI AL2 ALS RL4 ALS ALG RL7 ALS Te ALA El 1 Amp Relay ON Indicators e eon uos uos uos uos sor Ve Aux 12V Fuse 1 Amp NSS IE ETT ESSE Com NJO NIC Com NiO NIC Com NiO NIC Com NO NIC Com NO NIC Com NO NIC Com NiO NIC Com io NIC OV 12V Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Relay 7 Relay Outputs 1 8 Aux 12V Installation Before attempting to install the RM8 Relay Module
272. th and also which zone user the device is mapped to Note Signal strength should be greater than 30 The signal range is between 0 and 90 Deleting Devices To delete radio devices select the device number to be deleted then follow the procedure for learning a new device but press the button on the keypad when prompted to activate device instead of activating the tamper switch 122 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Engineer Utilities Ricochet Diagnostics V2 Only This menu displays information about the live system and is split into Premier Elite SmartKey and Ricochet enabled devices via Zones and Users Devices For Devices the following information can be viewed Routeing e RSSI e Alarms and Status Device visibility e Time since last message Premier Elite SmartKey For Premier Elite SmartKey the following information can be viewed Routeing RSSI Premier Elite SmartKey Button Status Interpreting Keypad Displays Routeing The image below shows that Zone 009 is routeing through 14 and then 7 to the expander for Premier Elite SmartKey this may vary depending on where amp when the reading is taken If question marks appear in the display it means the information is not available one Hao PIR 24 DD Ab RSSI Each value in the image below represents the RSSI levels in dBm at each of the hops If question marks appear on the display it means the inf
273. that suite the keypad sounder will also follow the areas defined by the suite Area Suite Text H HS ee Pe ina Area Programming Timers Area Programming Area Suite Text Ge Suite l Use keys 1 8toselect an Area Arm S uite or use the SCROLL key to searche g 4 Press NO to edit the Area Arm Suite text EAE fert pr Use keys 0 9 to program text the same way thata mobile phone works Bedtime Setting Edit Text ASC Text may be assigned to the Area Arm Suites to allow the user to select the suites by description instead of number Up to 16 characters of text can be programmed for each suite Example Text descriptions for the Area Arm Suites could be useful where more than one suite has been defined The user wishes to arm areas A and B at night but is not too sure which suite to select e Areas A and B would be assigned to Area Arm Suite 1 see page 56 for details e When the user wants to arm the system at night Area Arm Suite 1 would be selected e Text will be displayed to confirm that the selected suite is correct i e Bedtime Setting e Areas A and B are automatically selected for armed Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones Select characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate number of times to select a character on the same key press to move the cursor along INS176 10 57 Area Programming P
274. the system automatically returns to the normal day mode 11 Pulse Period 1 This timer controls how long any output with the Pulse Period 1 attribute assigned to it will activate for 12 Pulse Period 2 This timer controls how long any output with the Pulse Period 2 attribute assigned to it will activate for 13 Pulse Period 3 This timer controls how long any output with the Pulse Period 3 attribute assigned to it will activate for 14 ATS Fault Delay This timer controls the delay between a line fault occurring and an audible indication being generated by the system 15 AC Off Delay This timer controls the delay between an AC Mains failure occurring and an audible indication being generated by the 16 Batt Test Period This timer controls the frequency of the dynamic battery test 17 Batt Test Time This timer controls how long the dynamic battery test is carried out for 18 Soak Test Time This timer controls the number of days a zone with the Test attribute will remain on test for 19 Service Interval This timer controls the frequency of the Service Required condition occurring 20 Test Call Every This timer controls how often a test call is made to the monitoring station 024 daily etc 21 Min Random Time This timer controls the minimum length of time that the Random output attribute will activate for 22 Max Random Time This timer controls the maximum
275. timer expires no PA alarm will occur If a User code is not entered before the timer expires a PA alarm will occur see page 64 for details Q Quick Arm is Enabled Pressing the Area or Part keys will Arm or Part Arm the areas that the keypad is assigned to without the need to enter a User code first O Info LED gt Output The Info LED on the keypad comes on when the keypad output activates and goes off when the keypad output deactivates Keypad Speaker Volume This option controls the volume level of advisory tones from loudspeakers connected to the keypads Advisory tones consist of Entry Exit and Warning type tones 1 minimum 8 maximum ch Alarm tones are always full volume Keypad Sounder Options The sounder and speaker output in the keypad can be programmed so that certain types of tones are not generated When deselected Fire Alarms Fault Service Entry Exit and Chime tones will not be heard Select tones by pressing keys 1 to 8 a letter on the display means the tone is selected a Dot on the display means the tone is not selected F Fire Tones On Fire alarm tones will be generated by the keypad sounder speaker A Alarm Tones On Intruder alarm Tamper alarm and PA alarm tones will be generated by the keypad sounder speaker F Fault Tones On Fault tones will be generated by the keypad sounder speaker S Service Tone On Service and Warning tones will be generated by the keyp
276. tivate when the selected area is in the entry or exit mode and deactivate when the area is no longer in the entry or exit mode Assign any attributes i e Pulsed 1 would cause the output to be timed for the duration of the Pulse 1 timer Assign a House and Unit number i e this is the physical address of the X 10 Unit and ensures that the correct unit in the correct area operates when the output condition is met e the correct unit switches on and off during Entry Exit 82 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual System Outputs Custom Outputs Custom outputs are NOT physical outputs they are Software outputs that can be configured to operate under certain conditions Once configured these outputs can then be assigned to a physical output see system outputs 22 27 and 32 37 page 79 for details Custom Output 1 4 Stage A Will activate when switches 1 or 2 and 3 and 4 are active Custom Output 1 4 Stage B Will activate when switches 5 or 6 and 7 and 8 are active Custom Output 1 4 Stage AB Will activate when switches 1 or 2 and 3 and 4 are active OR switches 5 or 6 and 7 and 8 are active Example Switch 1 is programmed as Zone 1 Mimic Switch 2 is programmed as Zone 2 Mimic Switch 3 is programmed as Armed Switch 4 is programmed as Never Active and inverted e Custom Output 1 Stage A will only activate when switches 1 OR 2 AND 3 AND 4 are closed i e if ZONE 1 or ZONE 2
277. tput 4 Stage A activates and deactivates when Custom Output 4 Stage A deactivates 36 Custom4 Stage B This output type operates when Custom Output 4 Stage B activates and deactivates when Custom Output 4 Stage B deactivates 37 Custom4 Stage AB This output type operates when Custom Output 4 Stage A or B activates and deactivates when Custom Output 4 Stage A deactivates 38 Com 1 Fault This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 1 stops communicating with the control panel and deactivates when communication starts again 39 Com 2 Fault This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 2 stops communicating with the control panel and deactivates when communication starts again 40 Com 3 Fault This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 3 stops communicating with the control panel and deactivates when communication starts again 41 Com 1 No Signal This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 1 loses its signal and deactivates when its signal is regained 42 Com 2 No Signal This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 2 loses its signal and deactivates when its signal is regained 43 Com 3 No Signal This output type activates when whatever is connected to Com Port 3 loses its signal and deactivates when its signal is regained 44 Coms Fault This output type activates when
278. tter than 66 Marginal between 40 Signal Strength or Signal Strength or 40 66 or 88 88dBm 77dBm or better 77dBm A The signal strength LED works for both GSM and GPRS modes however the dBm reading is only seen on the keypad in GSM mode INS176 10 37 Installation Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Aerial Siting ALWAYS do a site survey to find an area of strong signal before installation Installing a Com GSM with a weak signal is bad installation practice The aerial should be mounted vertically at the point of strongest signal This is usually the highest point in the building often the loft area Avoid installing the aerial directiy under metal roofs or within metal skinned buildings because this will reduce the signal strength and may inhibit operation completely If this is unavoidable the strongest signal will be found away from the metal roof or close to large external windows or skylights Avoid installing the aerial close 2 metres to cable runs ducting structural metalwork metal pipes water tanks and electronic equipment e g photocopiers fax machines etc These can have similar effects to metal roofs Reliable operation is unlikely with a low signal strength If the display shows that the signal strength is 40 88dBm or lower you should improve the signal strength This may be achieved by repositioning the aerial The GPRS aerial lead should not be cut therefore
279. two 8Q loudspeakers as shown below Spk Spk 8Q Speaker Nore For details on testing Speaker outputs see page 114 External Sounder Connections The following terminals have been provided for connection to an external sounder A 12V 12V supply protected by a 1A fuse F4 Normally connected to 12V on the sounder B Bell Sounder output switches to OV in alarm SAB and is rated at 500mA Normally connected to Trigger ve on the sounder This output can also be programmed for SCB operation see page 64 for details C Tamp Negative tamper return Normally connected to Tamper Out on the sounder If this terminal is not being used it must be connected to OV D OV OV supply Normally connected to OV on the sounder S Strb Strobe output switches to OV in alarm and is rated at 500mA Normally connected to strobe ve on the sounder where applicable connect the strobe ve to 12V NOTE For EN50131 A INCERT installations the Bell 8 Aux Tamper must be wired to azone Grade 2 Installation Control Texecom Premier Panel Sounder A 12V 12V A B Bell Trigger ve B C Tamp Tamper C D ov OV D DESCH Strobe ve S Grade 3 Installation Texecom Control Premier Elite Panel Sounder A 12V 3 B Bell E vel C Tamp u D ov S Strb s 1 Aux Fault MSW Sub OV Tmp Bell 12V D
280. u options Master users can also change their own User codes and assign new users to the system The Master user will also activate any output programmed as Door Strike 2 Manager Manager users can arm disarm omit zones silence alarms and reset their assigned areas In addition Manager users can access all User menu options except Setup Users Manager users can also change their own User codes 3 Standard Standard users can arm all the areas assigned to the code and disarm all the areas assigned to the code even if only one area is in entry or alarm from any keypad omit zones silence alarms and reset their assigned areas In addition Standard users can access all User menu options except for Setup Users System Tests and Change Timers Standard users can also change their own User codes 4 Local Local users behave the same way as Standard users However Local users will only arm the area that the keypad is assigned to and disarm the area that is in entry or alarm provided that the code has that area assigned to it 5 Duress Duress users behave the same way as Standard users However Duress users will activate any outputs programmed as Panic Alarm or Duress whenever their code is entered Nore Duress users can only be set up by an Engineer if system is set to Grade 3 see configuration option 37 6 Arm Onl Arm Only users can only arm or reset their assigned areas and view the event log 7 Door
281. unt number to identify events Account Numbers A to H I to P This is the account number that will be reported to the Alarm Receiving Centre Each account number can be up to 6 digits Note n order for the control panel to use the area account numbers the area account Config option must be enabled see page 88 for details 90 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL amp Digi Options UDL Options y LI lone Be bisi det 3 UDL Didi DOFtions Reset Didi UBL Didi Ortions i Use keys 0 9 to ent UDL OFtions ee ate the telephone number Omit Chime Part 3 second Pause Area 10 Second Pause Press NO to edit the UDL Options Use keys 1 8 to select an option or use the SCROLL key to search select deselect Call De ME feat On Press NO to edit the Rings required Enter the number of rings required e g 3 6 rings Rings required gt BEE Press NO to edit the Dialling Attempts Dialling Attempts Ba Enter the number of dialling attempts e g 3 3 attempts Dialling Attempts gt BA INS176 10 91 UDL amp Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual The system has the following UDL download options Download Call Back Number 1 This is the telephone number that is dialled by the modem when Call back Number
282. upported serial device to the control panel see page 95 for details 15 Plug on Communicator Connections This socket provides connection for the plug on communicator see page 36 for details 16 Digicom Outputs Outputs 1 to 8 are low current 100mA ve applied and would normally be used when connecting a stand alone communicator to the control panel see page 34 for details Each output is fully programmable see page 78 for details A remote reset input and a line fault input are also provided 17 Flash Upgrade Port For use with the Flasher interface to update panel firmware 18 Box Tamper Connection The micro switch provides tamper protection for the main control panel in case of unauthorised access 19 Com Port 1 Com Port 1 is a serial communications port and can be used for connecting a PC running Wintex or any supported serial device to the control panel see page 95 for details 20 Tamper Disable Link This can be used to disable the box tamper when working with the box lid removed 10 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Installation 21 Load Defaults Button Press and hold this button whilst applying power to the control panel to load the factory default settings Press and hold this button for 7 seconds with power already on the panel to restore just the Engineer code to the factory setting of A D Ga Note Loading the factory defaults can take up to 30 seconds to
283. using Wintex downloading software The following tables show the default codes for each event on the system Default Zone Event Codes Zone Type Reporting Group Contact ID Entry Exit 1 Alarm Restore Alarm Restore 134 Omit Omit Reinstate Entry Exit 2 Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Alarm Alarm Restore Restore Omit Omit Reinstate Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Alarm Alarm Restore Omit Restore Omit Reinstate Guard Access Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Alarm Alarm Restore Restore Omit Omit Reinstate 24Hr Audible Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Tamper Alarm Restore Omit Restore Omit Reinstate 24Hr Silent Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Tamper Alarm Restore Restore Omit Omit Reinstate Audible PA Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Priority Alarm Alarm Restore Restore Omit Omit Reinstate Silent PA Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Priority Alarm Alarm Restore Restore Omit Omit Reinstate Fire Alarm Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Priority Alarm Alarm Restore Restore Omit Omit Reinstate Medical Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Priority Alarm Alarm Restore Restore Omit Omit Reinstate 24Hr Gas Alarm Reinstate Alarm Omit Reinstate Tamper Alarm Re
284. uts to be tested The following outputs can be individually tested Test Bell The Bell output Test Strobe The Strobe output Test Speaker The Speaker output Test Digi The Hardwired digicom outputs Test Panel The panel outputs Test RedCARE Test Com LCD Display User Outputs The plug on RedCARE outputs The plug on Com 300 2400 digi channels The LCD keypad display Any outputs that have the User Test attribute see page 82 for details Note Pressing OMIT at the Bell or Strobe Test will cause the Strobe output to pulse 3 times invoking Engineers Hold Off mode if a Texecom bell box is connected Do Walk Test 24 48 88 168 Engineer Utils Do walk test Press YES to walk test all areas or use keys 1 8 to select deselect areas Press CHIME to select Chime Once then lockout zone Chime on every activation or No Chime at all Press AREA to toggle the display between the zones that have been tested and the zones that still need testing To view zones that have not activated recently enter the number of days required i e 007 will show zones that have notactivated in the last 7 days zone Bal par Front Door Any of the zones on the system can be walk tested to ensure that they operate correctly A walk test can only be performed when the system or area is disarmed Nore Once a zone has been activated it will not generate a chime tone again If however the
285. vice cannot see either of the devices The chosen device can see the ODD device s The chosen device can see the EVEN device s The chosen device can see BOTH devices Example Fone AGS Shock In this example Zone 9 can see the DER devices as detailed below use the scroll key to view information about other devices Display a E D E Device 1 2 4 5 7 8 x x x Lov 3 6 Cansee x Lv Ly v NOTE On the 32XP W there are 16 windows to show information from the 32 devices of the system the format is the same Device Status Es ABS Shock Status asafrdtt Secure OK Active Fault Type a A Mag1 a A Mag2 Sho a A Reed PIR s S Poll Supervision p P Power Battery d D Device t T Rear t T Front Premier Elite SmartKey Messages Userppp Ficochet The chosen user does not have a Premier Elite Hot Ricochet SmartKey associated with them Userppz Ficochet The Premier Elite SmariKey is not switched Hot connected on Userppz Ficochet Shows the battery is OK and the fob has logged LaJan Bat Ok onto the system lIiserBA2 Ficochet Shows the different messages displayed when Partarm Bat DK the relevant buttons are pressed User f s Ricochet Disarm Bat OK LUserppz Ricochet Fullarm Bat OK UserG Ricochet Shows which Aux button has been pressed Aux Eat Ok when in Function Mode Use
286. way point of each iD spur It is especially important to do this on iD spurs that are less than 30 metres Cabling Considerations The iD loop can be wired using standard 4 core alarm cable this allows 2 cores to be used for the iD biscuit and 2 cores for supplying 12V power for PIR s etc The number of biscuits that can be connected per cable run is determined by the impedance of the cable used Standard 4 core alarm cable 7 0 2mm has a resistance of approximately 8 Ohms per 100 metres The following table shows the maximum number of biscuits that can be connected at the end of a single cable run using standard 4 core alarm cable Cable Length Maximum Number of Biscuits 100m 30 200m 15 400m 7 800m 3 If a different type of cable is used the distances should be re calculated e g if 7 0 4mm cable is used a single run of 200m would support 30 devices on the end as the resistance of the cable is halved When installing the iD loop it is usually more practical to run several cables from the expander module to the different areas of protection This effectively reduces any distance problems and makes fault finding much easier To reduce the risk of induced interference and wherever possible cables should not be positioned along side mains power telephone or other data transmission cables or run within the same ducting or trunking as any other cables The wiring for the system s internal sounders loudspe
287. wires of the PC COM to the TCD you then need to connect the Molex connector to Com1 or Com 2 Panel Com Port Setup The Com Port speed needs to be configured to19200 baud if using Com 2 Com 1 is set to 19200 baud at default and cannot be changed See page 95 Com Port Setup Panel ARC Setup To set up the ARC account only a few setting need to be made see page 85 Program Digi D Set the reporting Protocol to SIA or Contact ID e Set an account number e Select Connect via IP in the protocol options see page 89 Digi Options e Select Enable communicator Panel IP Setup The control panel communicates to the ARC via the EMIZON TCD The TCD s primary signalling path is via an IP network therefore the control panel need s an IP address so that it can connect to a local network Ensure that the customer has filled in the Customer IT Survey Form provided by EMIZON This will give you the information you need to set up the IP data on the control see page 94 Setup IP Module Connect the Ethernet cable between the Ethernet port on the TCD unit and the Network router Commissioning Now that the programming for the EMIZON21 is complete you need to power up the TCD and wait 15 seconds approx and check the following Flickering light on the Ethernet path LED e Flashing green light on the GPRS path LED These indicate that the signalling paths are available and that the TCD is read
288. xecom DO NOT supply SIM cards These will need to be sourced locally and care should be taken to source SIM cards in the country where the unit is to be used This will help reduce costs and avoid excessive data charges When using GSM as the communication method Data services will need to be enabled for upload download this may or may not be the same Telephone number GPRS SIM card setup In order to use GPRS the Premier Elite ComGSM must be programmed with certain parameters which are dictated by the SIM card used This is no different from mobile phones often called the GPRS Setup except that mobile phones are often supplied pre configured The configuration consists of the following e APN Access Point Name H Username e Password These parameters are entered into the Premier Elite ComGSM using a Texecom PC program called APNProgrammer on the Texecom CD supplied with the panel With the Premier Elite ComGSM powered and connected to a PC via a Texecom USBCom To power the Premier Elite ComGSM whilst programming connect the supplied harness to the control panel com port and the other end to the Engineers Keypad port on the Premier Elite ComGSM The Texecom USBCom should be connected to the com port on the Premier Elite ComGSM Use APNProgrammer to upload the required information to the Premier Elite ComGSM The supplier of the SIM card should provide the information required Premier Elite ComGSM Layout K
289. xt mode is entered Zone Chime Each zone can be programmed to chime the internal sounders using one of the available chime tones when activated INS176 10 53 Zone Setup Premier Elite Series Installation Manual Remote Test Enable Any zone with this attribute will be tested when the remote test function is initiated from Wintex Any detector on a zone with the remote test attribute will be expected to go into alarm during the remote test ifit does not go into alarm the detector will be reported as faulty Note This facility is only to be used in conjunction with system output type 47 Detector Test see page 79 Zone Wiring Zone wiring connections are shown on page 31 the following programming options are available 0 Normally Closed For use on normally closed devices without tamper protection Normally used for keyswitches See Normally Closed wiring diagram on page 31 1 Normally Open For use on normally closed devices without tamper protection Normally used for keyswitches See Normally Open wiring diagram on page 31 2 Double Pole EOL Default zone wiring configuration 3 Triple EOL Standard Texecom TEOL use this wiring type for all Texecom anti masking detectors 4 1K 1K 3K Alternative TEOL configuration with 1K alarm resistor 3K fault resistor and 1K EOL resistor 5 4K7 6k8 12K Alternative TEOL configuration with 6K8 alarm resistor 12K fault resistor and 4K7 EOL resistor
290. y YES to clear the screen or keep pressing NO to change between upper case lower case numerical and predictive text Edit Text CLR Central Heati nd Edit Text 312 Text may be assigned to PC Control Outputs 1 to 8 to allow the user to select the correct Output by description instead of number A maximum of 16 characters can be programmed for each of the PC Outputs Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones Select characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate number of times to select a character on the same key press lt gt to move the cursor along Custom O P Text EE ons SS Global Det ion System Tim imers Global OFtions Custom DP Text Use keys 1 4 to select a text option or use the SCROLL key to search ie 3 Custom O P 3 Text Press NO to editthe text Use keys 0 9 to program text the same way thata mobile phone works Com e Active Edit Text AB Text may be assigned to Custom Outputs 1 to 4 to allow indication on the keypads display when the output is active see page 83 for details Note Outputs 1 amp 2 are silent and outputs 3 amp 4 give an audible warning every 30 seconds for 3 minutes or until a code is entered or RESET is pressed Text is programmed in a similar way to mobile phones Select characters by pressing the corresponding key the appropriate numb
291. y has a local PC or other peripheral equipment connected an Texecom TTL Cable 05 0246 WebWay SPT Texecom T Red R Green Com Port 1 RTN Blue Connect the WebWay PWR and to any relevant Power 12V 24V and Ground OV terminals The Texecom panel configuration is uploaded via the Wintex software and downloaded to the panel on com port 2 from a local PC The following requires configuring in the panel Programming the Control Panel Digi Options Enable communicator must be ticked e UDL passcode set in the panel must match Dial attempts 1 ring before answer 3 NOTE See page 89 In ARC s 1 Account number site ID 2 SIA Level 2 3 3 Connect Via IP ticked 4 Send SIA text ticked NOTE See page 85 In Radio Pad and Com Port options Com Port 1 WebWayOne module Local IP address 127 0 0 1 Local IP port 50561 Gateway 127 0 0 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Name SMG port 50561 DARAN NOTE See page 94 Wintex Programming All other settings are done by the Wintex Comms menu This can be configured on a local PC plugged on to Com Port 2 with the Module running on Com Port 1 or vice versa Digi Options prre t Sade Dad ane Com Part Gegen Enter the options shown including the callback number 98 INS176 10 Premier Elite Series Installation Manual UDL amp Digi Options ARC s Optore tt Ade Pad are Con Part Opos Aen Cp Cares e F Mrena L
292. y to be commissioned Now you need to call The ARC 084404129009 with the TCD serial number that is printed on the label located on the front cover the ARC will then associate the TCD to this specific installation on their system and activate it If this is the first time this TCD is being installed you will need to wait for the tl indication to appear on the display and then press and hold the set button for 4 seconds The TCD will contact EMIZON service platform and the display will alternate between tl and 01 then CA completely Active Alternate flashing decimal points indicate normal operation following a successful commission The GPRS and Ethernet LED s will turn green to indicate that they are communicating with the service platform Wintex UDL via EMIZON 21 TCD To utilise the UDL option you will need to sign up with the Emizon UDL service After signing up you will be sent your security certificate along with UDL server login details You will also be given the server IP and port address You will need to enter these details in the Network details section of Panel details in Wintex You must also install the Emizon UDL software on to the PC you intend to use for UDL INS176 10 97 UDL 8 Digi Options Premier Elite Series Installation Manual WebWayOne WebWayOne integration with the control panels provides the following features 7 functions Automatic Commissioning ATS Mon

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

VC13 - Primo  FPGA Verilog notes  NGS Snowflake  Panas。niづ  Operating Instructions Sensepoint Toxic Sensor  Tacens aluminium HT EXTREME  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file